WO2019187365A1 - Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019187365A1
WO2019187365A1 PCT/JP2018/044988 JP2018044988W WO2019187365A1 WO 2019187365 A1 WO2019187365 A1 WO 2019187365A1 JP 2018044988 W JP2018044988 W JP 2018044988W WO 2019187365 A1 WO2019187365 A1 WO 2019187365A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
intermediate layer
transfer material
photosensitive resin
layer
photosensitive transfer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/044988
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋行 海鉾
恭平 小川
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020509632A priority Critical patent/JP7011047B2/en
Publication of WO2019187365A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019187365A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/11Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having cover layers or intermediate layers, e.g. subbing layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material, a method for manufacturing a resist pattern, a method for manufacturing circuit wiring, a touch panel, and a touch panel display device.
  • a display device such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device
  • a touch panel such as a capacitive input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part a peripheral wiring portion
  • a take-out wiring portion A conductive layer pattern such as wiring is provided inside the touch panel.
  • a patterned layer is formed by a photosensitive resin composition layer provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material because the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Japanese Patent No. 2832409 discloses at least (1) a support, (2) an intermediate layer having a film thickness of 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m provided on the support, and (3) provided on the intermediate layer.
  • a photopolymerizable resin material comprising a photopolymerizable resin layer containing a carboxyl group-containing binder, wherein the intermediate layer contains hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is disclosed.
  • JP-A-2016-57632 discloses (A) a novolak-type phenol resin obtained from metacresol and para-cresol, (B) a novolac-type phenol resin obtained from ortho-cresol, and (C) an acid generated by light. And a positive photosensitive resin composition containing the compound.
  • the substrate, the positive photosensitive resin layer, and the temporary support are formed by attaching the photosensitive transfer material to the substrate.
  • a laminate having at least this order is formed.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer is developed to form a resist pattern.
  • a photomask having a pattern on the surface of the laminate from which the temporary support is peeled It has been studied to perform exposure (also referred to as “contact exposure”) by bringing it into contact with only a “mask”.
  • the problem to be solved by the embodiment according to the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material in which contamination of a photomask during contact exposure is suppressed, and a method for manufacturing the same.
  • Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a resist pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, a touch panel, and a touch panel display device using the photosensitive transfer material. is there.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects. ⁇ 1> a temporary support; The middle layer, A positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, The temporary support and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other; On the surface of the intermediate layer on the side in contact with the temporary support, the scratch depth of the scratch test measured by a scratch rate of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g is less than 0.40 ⁇ m.
  • Photosensitive transfer material ⁇ 2> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 1>, wherein the intermediate layer contains a cellulose ether compound.
  • ⁇ 4> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 3>, wherein the particles contained in the intermediate layer have an average particle diameter of 1 nm to 200 nm.
  • a second intermediate layer in contact with the positive photosensitive resin layer is further included between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer, The photosensitive layer according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the second intermediate layer contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group.
  • Transfer material ⁇ 6> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 5>, wherein the second intermediate layer further contains particles.
  • ⁇ 7> The photosensitive transfer material according to ⁇ 6>, wherein the average particle size of the particles contained in the second intermediate layer is 1 nm to 200 nm.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer comprises a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator.
  • ⁇ 9> a step of applying a composition for forming an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and Including a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition, The method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8> above.
  • ⁇ 10> a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition on the cover film; Applying an intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition; and Including a step of attaching a temporary support on the intermediate layer forming composition,
  • ⁇ 12> a step of bringing the positive photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 8> into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate; Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material; A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled; Developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern; And a step of etching the substrate in a region where the resist pattern is not disposed, in this order.
  • ⁇ 14> A touch panel display device comprising the touch panel according to ⁇ 13>.
  • the manufacturing method of the resist pattern using the said photosensitive transfer material can be provided.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
  • symbol may be abbreviate
  • the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value of another numerical description.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
  • “(meth) acrylic acid” is a concept including both acrylic acid and methacrylic acid
  • “(meth) acrylate” is a concept including both acrylate and methacrylate
  • the “) acryloyl group” is a concept including both an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
  • the amount of each component in a layer such as a positive photosensitive resin layer is such that when a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the layer, the plurality of substances present in the layer unless otherwise specified. Means the total amount.
  • the term “process” in the present disclosure is not limited to an independent process, and even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, it is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved. It is.
  • “mass%” and “wt%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
  • a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (both trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified.
  • the molecular weight was detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • HLC registered trademark
  • TSKgel registered trademark
  • Super HZM-M 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, Tosoh was used as a column.
  • Super HZ4000 (4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation)
  • Super HZ3000 (4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation)
  • Super HZ2000 (4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm, Tosoh Corporation)
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • the calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
  • the total solid content means the total mass of components excluding volatile components such as a solvent in the composition.
  • the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • “light” is a concept including active energy rays such as ⁇ rays, ⁇ rays, electron beams, ultraviolet rays, visible rays, and infrared rays.
  • the “exposure” in the present disclosure is not limited to exposure using an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV (Extreme ultraviolet) light, etc. And exposure with particle beams such as an ion beam.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, and the temporary support and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other.
  • the scratch depth of the scratch test measured with a scratch speed of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface of the layer in contact with the temporary support is less than 0.40 ⁇ m.
  • the present inventors have found that when contact exposure is performed using a photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent No. 2832409 or Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-57632, contamination of the mask may occur.
  • the photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent No. 2832409 is a photosensitive transfer material having a negative photosensitive resin layer, and is softer than a photosensitive transfer material having a positive photosensitive resin layer. It tends to be deep.
  • the photomask and the intermediate layer are bonded during contact exposure, the photosensitive resin layer is peeled off from the substrate when the photomask is peeled off, resulting in contamination of the mask due to the components of the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer. May end up.
  • the photosensitive transfer material described in JP-A-2016-57632 includes a positive photosensitive resin layer, but does not have a hard intermediate layer having a scratch depth of less than 0.40 ⁇ m.
  • the plastic deformation is difficult to be suppressed, and the mask may be contaminated with components contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer. Therefore, as a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have determined that the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a scratching speed of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface in contact with the temporary support.
  • An advantage of performing contact exposure is that the shape of the resist pattern obtained after development is good.
  • the present inventors perform exposure by arranging a mask on a temporary support as conventionally performed, the exposure light is reflected at the interface of the substrate or the positive photosensitive resin layer. It has been found that the photosensitive resin layer is exposed by a standing wave generated by the interference between the reflected wave and the incident wave, and a step-like cut occurs in the side surface portion of the resist pattern obtained after development.
  • the present inventors consider that it is effective to reduce the distance between the mask and the photosensitive resin layer as much as possible in order to suppress the occurrence of the step-like cut, and the temporary support is peeled off to make contact. It was considered preferable to perform exposure. That is, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has, for example, a minute amount from the viewpoint that the contamination of the mask at the time of contact exposure is suppressed and the occurrence of the stepped cut is suppressed by performing the contact exposure. It is also considered useful when forming a resist pattern.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
  • FIG. 1 schematically illustrates an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • a temporary support 10 In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a positive photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the intermediate layer 12 is in contact with the temporary support 10, and the scratch depth on the surface in contact with the temporary support is 0.40 ⁇ m or more.
  • an intermediate layer that is in contact with the temporary support and has a scratch depth of 0.40 ⁇ m or more on the surface in contact with the temporary support is used as the temporary support and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • middle layer is a layer used as the outermost layer in the photosensitive transfer material after peeling of a temporary support body.
  • the scratch depth of the scratch test measured with a scratch rate of 1 mm / s, the tip diameter of the indenter 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface of the intermediate layer in contact with the temporary support is less than 0.40 ⁇ m. It is preferably less than 38 ⁇ m, and more preferably less than 0.36 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit of the scratch depth of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited and may be 0.20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the scratch depth is measured by the following measurement method. If necessary, the cover film is peeled off from the photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material is laminated on a glass plate, and then the temporary support is peeled off from the boundary surface with the intermediate layer to expose the intermediate layer.
  • a surface property tester (Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd., Type: 14DR) is used as a scratch test device.
  • a spherical indenter (diamond, tip diameter 0.075 mm) is used as an indenter for scratching.
  • the above-prepared glass substrate is set with the photosensitive transfer material surface facing up, and the load is 5 g, the scratching speed is 1 mm / s, and the scratching distance is 50 mm.
  • the measurement environment is air at room temperature (23 ° C.).
  • a scanning white interference microscope manufactured by Zygo, New View 5020 is used for scratch shape observation.
  • NewView 5020 data analysis software (MetroPro)
  • the scratch depth is measured in the Micro mode, the Z-direction scan length is ⁇ 20 ⁇ m, and the other conditions are the default settings.
  • the arithmetic average value of the measurement results in five measurements is defined as the scratch depth.
  • the intermediate layer may be formed of any material as long as the above scratch depth is within the above range, but is preferably a layer that is removed by development.
  • the intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble or water-dispersible layer from the viewpoint that it is preferably removed by development.
  • water-soluble means that the amount of the target substance dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more.
  • water dispersibility means that the amount of precipitate after 24 hours is less than 0.01 parts by mass when 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. and 0.1 parts by mass of the target substance are mixed.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a cellulose ether compound from the viewpoints of adhesion to the positive photosensitive resin layer, releasability from the temporary support, and the like.
  • the cellulose ether compound is a compound having a structure in which the cellulose compound is etherified, and the cellulose compound is a polymer obtained by polymerizing a plurality of anhydrous glucose.
  • the cellulose ether compound is not particularly limited as long as the scratch depth in the scratch test is less than 0.40 ⁇ m, and examples thereof include hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, ethylcellulose, ethylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, From the viewpoint of suppression, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is preferred.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cellulose ether compound is preferably 100 ° C. to 200 ° C., more preferably 120 ° C. to 180 ° C.
  • the glass transition temperature can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC). The specific measurement method is performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011).
  • an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig) is used. The method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically. When determining the glass transition temperature, hold at a temperature about 50 ° C.
  • the extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig) that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line obtained by extending the low-temperature side baseline in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high-temperature side, and the step-like change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is maximum.
  • Tg As a method for adjusting Tg to the above-mentioned preferred range, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit, using the FOX formula as a guide, It is possible to control the Tg of the specific polymer.
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether compound is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
  • cellulose ether compound Commercially available products may be used as the cellulose ether compound, and preferred commercial products include Metrolose 60SH-03, Metrolose 60SH-06, Metrolze 60SH-15 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain one kind of cellulose ether compound or two or more kinds in combination.
  • the content of the cellulose ether compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 25% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. % Or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass or less.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure may further include particles from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion with the positive photosensitive resin layer or the second resin layer described later.
  • the particles include inorganic particles and resin particles. From the viewpoint of suppression of mask contamination, silica particles, alumina particles, or resin particles are preferable, silica particles or alumina particles are more preferable, and silica particles are preferable. More preferably it is.
  • Inorganic particles include inorganic oxide particles such as silica, alumina, zirconia, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, germanium oxide, indium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), antimony oxide, cerium oxide, and the like. Can be mentioned.
  • the resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid esters, and methacrylic acid esters, cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate, Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymers, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyvinyl polymers such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, polyvinyl alcohol and copolymers of vinyl compounds, polyesters, polyurethanes, polyamides Condensation polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, rubber thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermopolymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Emissions compounds and the like.
  • acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic
  • the surface of the particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability.
  • the particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface.
  • the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
  • the average particle diameter of the particles is preferably 10 nm to 200 nm.
  • the method for measuring the average particle size of the particles in the present disclosure refers to the arithmetic average of the particle sizes of 200 arbitrary particles in the intermediate layer using an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain particles alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (the volume ratio occupied by the particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% by volume to 90% by volume with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 10% by volume to 80% by volume, more preferably 15% by volume to 70% by volume, and particularly preferably 20% by volume to 60% by volume.
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure can contain a known additive as required in addition to the cellulose ether compound.
  • other additives used for a positive photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
  • the thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m to 8 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of contact exposure. Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate
  • the method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the intermediate layer can be formed by using a composition for forming an intermediate layer. Specifically, each component contained in the intermediate layer and the solvent are mixed at a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, and dissolved by stirring to prepare an intermediate layer forming composition for forming the intermediate layer. Can do. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m. Details of the method for forming the intermediate layer using the intermediate layer forming composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, which will be described later.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may further include a second intermediate layer in contact with the positive photosensitive resin layer between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the resist pattern shape for example, the line width of the pattern
  • the property that the shape of the resist pattern hardly changes even after development after a lapse of time after exposure is also referred to as “excellent placement stability (PED (post exposure delay))”.
  • PED post exposure delay
  • the photosensitive transfer material for 3 hours After exposure and before development Leaving the photosensitive transfer material for 3 hours is referred to as leaving for 3 hours.
  • the reason why the effect of excellent retention stability can be obtained by including the second intermediate layer is not clear, but for example, some suppression of the increase in developability due to the exposure reaction of the positive photosensitive resin composition It is presumed that it has an action.
  • the second intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble or water-dispersible layer.
  • middle layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of compound chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin which has a cellulose ether compound and a hydroxyl group from a standpoint of placement stability.
  • -Cellulose ether compound Although it does not specifically limit as a cellulose ether compound, From a viewpoint of a standing stability improvement, a hydroxypropyl cellulose is preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether compound is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
  • HPC-SSL manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.
  • an acrylic resin having a monomer unit having a hydroxy group is preferred.
  • the monomer unit having a hydroxy group include hydroxyalkyl acrylates such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, alkylene glycol monoacrylate, and polyalkylene. Examples include glycol monoacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
  • the acrylic resin having a hydroxy group may have, as other structural units, a structural unit B having an acid group in a specific polymer described later, a structural unit C, and the like.
  • the second intermediate layer may contain at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, or a combination of two or more.
  • the content of at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group is based on the total mass of the second intermediate layer, It is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 25% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass or less.
  • the second intermediate layer preferably contains particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the particles contained in the second intermediate layer are synonymous with the particles contained in the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • middle layer can contain a well-known additive as needed.
  • other additives used for a positive photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
  • the thickness of the second intermediate layer is preferably from 0.1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.2 ⁇ m to 8 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably from 0.5 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of further improving the placement stability and the effect of contact exposure. .
  • the total thickness of the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of contact exposure. 2 ⁇ m to 8 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.5 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m is particularly preferable.
  • Method for forming second intermediate layer Although the formation method in particular of a 2nd intermediate
  • a composition can be prepared. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 5 ⁇ m. Details of the method for forming the intermediate layer using the second intermediate layer forming composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described later.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer and is peelable from the intermediate layer.
  • the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the temporary support may have a layer that is peeled off together with the temporary support when the temporary support is peeled off.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. do it.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photoacid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are produced in response to active energy rays (active rays), and the deprotection of the protected acid groups in the specific polymer.
  • the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, a large value such as the power of 10, which is a so-called chemical High sensitivity is obtained as a result of amplification.
  • a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to active energy rays, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less and does not correspond to a chemical amplification type. .
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group. Is preferred.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain other polymers in addition to the polymer having the structural unit A.
  • the polymer having the structural unit A and other polymers are also collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
  • the structural unit A having an acid-decomposable protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by acid decomposability. Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned later, respectively.
  • the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition may further contain a polymer other than these.
  • the polymer component in the present disclosure means a material including other polymers added as necessary. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to surfactant, a crosslinking agent, and a dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
  • the specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer has a structural unit represented by any one of the above formulas A1 to A3 as the structural unit A as a specific polymer from the viewpoint of solubility in a developer, transferability, and the like. It is preferable that a polymer (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer A-1”) is included.
  • a polymer hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer A-1”
  • the specific polymer as the structural unit A, a structural unit represented by any one of the above formulas A1 to A3, and It is more preferable to include a polymer having an acid group.
  • the specific polymer contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer component preferably includes a polymer A-1 having at least a structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, an extremely sensitive chemical amplification positive type positive photosensitive resin layer can be obtained.
  • the “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure those known as an acid group and an acid-decomposable group can be used, and are not particularly limited.
  • Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the acid group protected by acid decomposability is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group protected by a group represented by the formula A3).
  • An acetal functional group such as tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as tert-butyl carbonate group or the like. it can.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in line width in the obtained circuit wiring.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group preferably contains a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas A1 to A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it includes a structural unit represented by -2.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may combine to form a cyclic ether, and each R 24 independently represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, Represents an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, Y represents —S— or —O—.
  • R 11 or R 12 when R 11 or R 12 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 11 or R 12 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 11 and R 12 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 13 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 11 to R 13 may have a substituent.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 11 or R 12 and R 13 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an alkylene group, —C ( ⁇ O) O—, —C ( ⁇ O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent.
  • the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • X B contains —C ( ⁇ O) O—
  • an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C ( ⁇ O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable.
  • R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 15 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be further lowered. More specifically, the structural unit in which R 14 in Formula A1 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total content of the structural unit A contained in the polymer A-1. In addition, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 14 in formula A1 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
  • NMR 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula A1-2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R B12 represents a substituent
  • n Represents an integer of 0-4.
  • R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • Formulas A1-2 and R B12 represent a substituent, and are preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom.
  • the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
  • R 21 and R 22 are alkyl groups, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms are preferable.
  • R 21 and R 22 are aryl groups, a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R 11 and R 12 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably at least one is a hydrogen atom.
  • R 23 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • each R 24 is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. R 24 may be further substituted with the same group as R 24 .
  • m is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
  • R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable.
  • R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R 31 and R 32 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • Y represents —S— or —O—, and —O— is preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group.
  • the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is also excellent.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be further lowered. More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total amount of the structural unit represented by formula A3 contained in polymer A-1.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A1 is a hydrogen atom is usually determined from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by the method.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula A3-2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the exposure sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group.
  • R 31, R 32, R 33 , R 34 and X 0 has the same meaning as R 31, R 32, R 33 , R 34 and X 0 in formula A3, preferred embodiments as well It is.
  • the structural unit represented by the following formula A3-3 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit A contained in the polymer A-1 may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the polymer A-1 is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1. More preferably, it is 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer A-1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the proportion of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
  • the polymer A-1 preferably contains a structural unit B having an acid group.
  • the structural unit B is a structural unit having a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protective group.
  • the acid group in this specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the acid group is usually incorporated into a polymer as a structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) using a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
  • structural unit B structural unit having an acid group
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • Introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A-1 is carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group or by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid anhydride structure and hydrolyzing the acid anhydride. Can do.
  • the structural unit having an acid group which is the structural unit B, is derived from a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or (meth) acrylic acid. More preferred is a structural unit.
  • Specific examples of the monomer having a carboxy group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, 4-carboxystyrene, and the like. Examples thereof include hydroxystyrene and 4-hydroxyphenyl methacrylate, and examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride.
  • a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes better.
  • the monomer having an acid group that can form the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
  • the structural unit B contained in the polymer A-1 may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer A-1 preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1.
  • the content is more preferably 15% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer A-1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • styrenes (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
  • the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be easily adjusted.
  • the glass transition temperature By setting the glass transition temperature to 120 ° C. or less, the positive photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A-1 can maintain a good level of transferability and peelability from the temporary support while forming a pattern. Better resolution and sensitivity.
  • the polymer A-1 may contain only one type of structural unit C, or may contain two or more types of structural unit C.
  • the structural unit C specifically includes styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Mention may be made of structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to
  • the structural unit C a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material.
  • monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned.
  • the structural unit C is preferably a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the content of the structural unit C is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the polymer A-1 also contains a structural unit having an ester of an acid group in the structural unit B as the structural unit C. This also optimizes the solubility in the developer and the physical properties of the positive photosensitive resin layer. It is preferable from a viewpoint of making it.
  • the polymer A-1 preferably includes a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group as the structural unit B, and further includes a structural unit C including a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component.
  • a polymer containing the structural unit B derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is more preferred.
  • preferred examples of the polymer A-1 in the present disclosure will be given, but the present disclosure is not limited to the following examples.
  • the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A-1 in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, and preferably 20 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. from the viewpoint of transferability and the adjustment of the heating temperature in the heating step described above. More preferably, the temperature is not higher than 30 ° C, and more preferably not lower than 30 ° C and not higher than 50 ° C.
  • the FOX formula is used as a guideline. It is possible to control the Tg of the target polymer A-1.
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1
  • the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2
  • the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the acid value of the polymer A-1 is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 200 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 5 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint of developability and transferability.
  • A 56.11 ⁇ Vs ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ f / w
  • Vs Amount of 0.1 mol / l sodium hydroxide aqueous solution required for titration (mL)
  • f Potency of 0.1 mol / l sodium hydroxide aqueous solution
  • the molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight.
  • the melt viscosity of the positive photosensitive resin layer is suppressed to be low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is performed when bonding to the substrate.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
  • the ratio (dispersity) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the polymer A-1 is not particularly limited.
  • a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A represented by the formula A, and a structural unit B having an acid group It is synthesized by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming a polymer and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming other structural unit C. be able to. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer is 50% by mass to 99% by mass of the polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably included in a proportion of .9% by mass, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer has a content of 50% by mass or more of the polymer A-1 with respect to the total solid content of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably contained in a proportion of 99.9% by mass, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer includes, as a polymer component, the structural unit (a) represented by the formula A as long as the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure are not impaired in addition to the polymer A-1.
  • the polymer may further be included (sometimes referred to as “other polymer”).
  • the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less and more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component. Preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer or two or more types.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer).
  • ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 manufactured by BASF or the like can also be used.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less.
  • a photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably ⁇ 10.0 or more, for example.
  • the photoacid generator examples include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure
  • a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1) is preferable.
  • R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
  • any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched. It may have a ring structure. Acceptable substituents are described below.
  • the alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like) or a halogen atom.
  • a aryl group for R 21 an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable.
  • the aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
  • the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • a photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. And more preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent.
  • the photosensitive resin composition for forming the positive photosensitive resin layer is for easily forming the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by applying and drying a photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent.
  • a known solvent can be used as the solvent used in the present disclosure.
  • Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones.
  • Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together.
  • two or more solvents for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
  • the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof. Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
  • Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, preferably 100 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass. Further, the content of the solvent in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, it is 0.5 mass% or less.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain a known additive as required in addition to the polymer A-1 and the photoacid generator.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer A-1.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the polymer A-1 and exhibits plasticity.
  • the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
  • R represents an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 50
  • * represents a bonding site with another atom.
  • compound X a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure
  • compound X is a chemically amplified positive type obtained by mixing compound X, polymer A-1 and a photoacid generator. If the photosensitive resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared to the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without the compound X, it does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure.
  • the optionally added surfactant is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition, and thus does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present specification.
  • plasticizer examples include, but are not limited to, compounds having the following structure.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. Is more preferable.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of plasticizer or two or more types.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may further contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state.
  • the sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise
  • anthracene derivative a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
  • Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
  • Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. .
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
  • the basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • aliphatic amine examples include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like.
  • examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
  • aromatic amine examples include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undecene.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
  • the said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferred.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can include a heterocyclic compound.
  • a heterocyclic compound There is no restriction
  • a heterocyclic monomer having silicon, sulfur, phosphorus or the like can be added.
  • the addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer when the heterocyclic compound is added. It is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
  • Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
  • a compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product.
  • JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like, such as commercial products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A can be mentioned.
  • bisphenol A type epoxy resin bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
  • the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
  • the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound.
  • Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
  • Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, ⁇ -glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and ⁇ -methacryloxy.
  • ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and ⁇ -methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, ⁇ -glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .
  • KP manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-Top manufactured by JEMCO
  • MegaFac registered trademark
  • Fluorard manufactured by Sumitomo 3M
  • Asahi Guard Asahi Guard
  • Surflon registered trademark
  • PolyFox manufactured by OMNOVA
  • SH-8400 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • a surfactant it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent.
  • a preferable example is a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
  • R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group.
  • L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms
  • p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio
  • p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%.
  • Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass
  • r represents an integer of 1 to 18
  • s represents an integer of 1 to 10
  • * represents a bonding site with another structure.
  • L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2).
  • R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
  • Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
  • the addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, the content is 01% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplier, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, Known additives such as ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, crosslinking agents, and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added. Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
  • a photosensitive resin composition for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and by an arbitrary method, and stirring and dissolving. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio.
  • the composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m or the like. Details of the method for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer using the photosensitive resin composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described later.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the positive photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter also referred to as “other layer”).
  • Other layers include contrast enhancement layers, cover films, other intermediate layers included between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, layers containing known UV absorbers, thermoplastic resin layers, adhesive layers, etc. Can be mentioned. Examples of the other intermediate layer include the same layers as the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film.
  • the cover film include a resin film and paper.
  • a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and for example, a thickness of 1 ⁇ m to 2 mm is preferable.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer is preferably peeled between the intermediate layer and the thermoplastic resin layer when the temporary support is peeled off. That is, it is preferable that the thermoplastic resin layer is peeled off together with the temporary support.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively.
  • thermoplastic resin layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of thermoplastic resin chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acryl copolymer from a transferable viewpoint.
  • the photosensitive transfer material is manufactured according to the method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
  • a solution for thermoplastic resin layer
  • a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support.
  • a coating solution prepared by adding a resin and an additive to a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer after applying a coating liquid) and drying to provide a thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate)
  • the layer composition is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer.
  • a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer is further applied, and dried to laminate a positive photosensitive resin layer, whereby the photosensitive property according to the present disclosure is obtained.
  • a transfer material can be suitably produced.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the positive photosensitive resin layer. It is preferable to have a contrast enhancement layer between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • a contrast enhancement layer is a material that absorbs light with respect to an exposure wavelength before exposure, but gradually decreases with exposure, that is, a material that increases light transmittance (photodecoloration). It is a layer containing a coloring pigment component).
  • Known photodecolorable dye components include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, arylnitroso salts, and the like.
  • a phenolic resin or the like is used as the film forming component.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber (ultraviolet absorbing layer).
  • the ultraviolet absorbing layer is preferably included on the opposite side of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the intermediate layer.
  • the aspect which has a ultraviolet absorption layer between a cover film and a positive photosensitive resin layer is mentioned.
  • an ultraviolet absorbing layer is present between the substrate and the positive photosensitive resin layer. According to such an aspect, it is considered that the reflection of the exposure light by the base material is reduced, and the influence of the exposure by the standing wave generated by the interference between the reflected wave and the incident wave is reduced.
  • ultraviolet absorber known ultraviolet absorbers can be used without particular limitation, and compounds such as salicylates, benzophenones, benzotriazoles, cyanoacrylates, nickel chelates, hindered amines, etc., and polymers containing these structures Or inorganic ultraviolet absorbers such as metal oxides.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may further have an adhesion layer between the cover film and the positive photosensitive resin layer as another layer.
  • an adhesion layer By having the adhesion layer, the adhesion when transferred to a substrate or the like is improved.
  • the first aspect of the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes: Applying a composition for forming an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and A step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the second aspect of the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes: Applying a photosensitive resin composition on the cover film; Applying an intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition; and A step of attaching a temporary support to the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can be obtained by any of the methods of the first aspect and the second aspect.
  • the step of applying the intermediate layer forming composition on the temporary support in the first embodiment is a step of applying the above-described intermediate layer forming composition on the temporary support.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition is preferably applied so as to be in contact with the temporary support.
  • the step of applying the photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition includes the above-described photosensitive property on the applied intermediate layer forming composition. It is a step of applying a resin composition.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer coating step when the second intermediate layer forming composition is present on the intermediate layer forming composition, the photosensitive resin layer is contacted with the second intermediate layer forming composition. It is preferable to apply a functional resin composition.
  • the first aspect may further include a step of applying the second intermediate layer forming composition onto the intermediate layer forming composition (second intermediate layer applying step).
  • coating process is a process of apply
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution.
  • the second intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • the second intermediate layer forming composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the intermediate layer forming composition, or other intermediate layer forming composition may be applied to the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the second intermediate layer forming composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the composition for forming another layer.
  • Said 1st aspect may further include the process (other layer application
  • Other layers include other intermediate layers formed between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, or layers including a known ultraviolet absorber formed on the positive photosensitive resin layer. Is mentioned.
  • the composition used for forming the other layer is applied onto the intermediate layer forming composition before the application of the second intermediate layer forming composition, for example.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution. You may dry the composition used for formation of another layer as needed after the said application
  • the first aspect may further include a step of attaching a cover film to the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side.
  • a known method may be used.
  • a known laminating method or the like is used.
  • the step of applying the photosensitive resin composition on the cover film is a step of applying the above-described photosensitive resin composition on the cover film.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the positive photosensitive resin layer coating step in the first aspect described above.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • the photosensitive resin composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the cover film, or a composition used for forming another layer is applied on the cover film. If present, it may be applied on the composition used for forming the other layer.
  • the step of applying the intermediate layer forming composition onto the photosensitive resin composition includes the above-mentioned intermediate layer forming composition on the applied photosensitive resin composition. It is the process of apply
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the intermediate layer coating step of the first aspect described above.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • the intermediate layer coating step if there is a second intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition, the intermediate layer forming composition is applied on the second intermediate layer forming composition.
  • the second aspect may further include a step of applying the second intermediate layer forming composition onto the photosensitive resin composition (second intermediate layer applying step).
  • coating process is a process of apply
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the second intermediate layer coating step of the first aspect described above.
  • the second intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
  • Said 2nd aspect may further include the process (other layer application
  • the other layers include other intermediate layers formed between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, or a layer containing a known ultraviolet absorber formed on the positive photosensitive resin layer. It is done.
  • the composition used for forming the other layer is applied onto the second intermediate layer forming composition before the application of the intermediate layer forming composition, for example.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the other layer coating process of the first aspect described above. You may dry the composition used for formation of another layer as needed after the said application
  • Step of pasting temporary support Said 2nd aspect includes the process of sticking a temporary support body on the composition for intermediate
  • the temporary support is preferably attached so as to be in contact with the intermediate layer forming composition.
  • a known method may be used.
  • a known laminating method or the like is used.
  • the photosensitive transfer material can be produced by either the first or second embodiment.
  • the intermediate layer or the second intermediate layer
  • the intermediate layer contains particles, and the first layer It is preferable to set it as an aspect.
  • the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate; Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material; A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled; It is preferable to include the step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a resist pattern in this order.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate; Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material; A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled; Developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern; It is preferable that the process of etching the said board
  • the “outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side” in the photosensitive transfer material is the present disclosure having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order.
  • it means not the outermost layer on the temporary support side but the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side.
  • the “outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side” is the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side after the cover film is peeled off when the photosensitive transfer material has a cover film.
  • the support is also referred to as a “base material”, and the support having a conductive layer on the surface is also referred to as a “substrate”.
  • photosensitive resin layers are classified into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image due to differences in photosensitive systems.
  • the positive type by irradiating actinic rays, for example, to improve the solubility of the exposed portion using a photosensitive agent that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, both the exposed and unexposed portions are exposed at the time of pattern exposure. If the pattern shape obtained is not cured and the substrate is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like.
  • the present disclosure uses the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • an embodiment in which exposure is performed twice or more is also preferable.
  • the method of manufacturing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of attaching the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the positive photosensitive resin layer side with respect to a substrate. It is preferable to include a step of bonding the outermost layer in contact with the substrate (bonding step).
  • bonding step When the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication has the said cover film, in the bonding process, bonding is performed after peeling a cover film.
  • the substrate and the photosensitive transfer material from which the cover film has been peeled off as necessary are pressure-bonded so that the substrate and the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side are in contact with each other. It is preferable to do.
  • the positive type photosensitive resin layer by which the pattern formation after exposure and image development can be used suitably as an etching resist at the time of etching a conductive layer.
  • a well-known transfer method and a lamination method can be used. Specifically, the substrate and the photosensitive transfer material are overlapped so that the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material and the conductive layer are in contact with each other, and pressure is applied by a roll or the like. And the method performed to heating is mentioned preferably.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase the productivity can be used.
  • the pressure and temperature of the bonding in the bonding step and the surface material of the support to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer, the conveyance speed, and the pressure bonding machine used, etc. Can be set as appropriate. Further, in the case where the cover film is provided on the positive photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material, the cover film may be removed from the positive photosensitive resin layer and then bonded. When the base material is a resin film, a roll-to-roll pressure bonding may be performed.
  • a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material.
  • the support is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • the support is preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the support may be composed of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and tempered glass represented by Corning's gorilla glass can be used.
  • materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
  • a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate with low optical distortion and a substrate with high transparency.
  • Specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
  • Examples of the conductive layer formed on the support include any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring. It is also preferable that a plurality of conductive layers are formed on the support.
  • Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides. Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
  • At least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor for a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring for a peripheral extraction part.
  • the substrate (wiring forming substrate) used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of the base material.
  • a wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer.
  • a film substrate such as PET is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
  • the resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material (temporary support peeling step).
  • temporary support peeling step There is no restriction
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer is formed by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been removed. It is preferable to include a pattern exposure step (exposure step). In the exposure process, the exposure mask contacts the intermediate layer. By performing exposure with the exposure mask and the intermediate layer in contact with each other, there is an advantage that the distance between the positive photosensitive resin layer and the mask is reduced, so that the resolution of the pattern is improved.
  • the exposure step it is preferable to irradiate the base material on which at least the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer are formed with actinic rays through a mask having a pattern.
  • the photoacid generator contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer is decomposed to generate an acid, and the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed by the catalytic action of the generated acid.
  • an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is formed.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern in the mask are not particularly limited.
  • the electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring are preferably fine wires of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • Visible light, ultraviolet light, and an electron beam are mentioned as actinic light, However, Visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable and an ultraviolet-ray is especially preferable.
  • an exposure light source using actinic light a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light-emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used, g-line (436 nm), i-line (365 nm) Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as h-line (405 nm), can be preferably used.
  • irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed.
  • various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, and a laser exposure can be used.
  • Exposure dose depending on the positive photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 200mJ / cm 2, it is 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 100mJ / cm 2 More preferred. It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the positive photosensitive resin layer during exposure.
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • the resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern (developing step).
  • the exposed part in the positive photosensitive resin layer is removed by the development process.
  • Development of the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as the positive photosensitive resin layer can be developed.
  • a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A No. 5-72724 can be used.
  • the developer is preferably a developer in which the portion where the positive photosensitive resin layer is removed exhibits a dissolution type development behavior.
  • the developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably, for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
  • the development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like may be used.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the positive photosensitive resin layer after exposure. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
  • the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure includes a step of washing with water after development, a step of drying a support having the obtained resist pattern, and the like. A known process may be included.
  • the post-baking process which heat-processes the resist pattern obtained by image development.
  • the post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa or more, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is preferably performed in an environment of 121.6 kPa or less, more preferably in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and particularly preferably in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
  • the post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the transport speed of the support in each step in the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, but is 0.5 m / It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the substrate in a region where the resist pattern is not disposed.
  • the conductive layer is etched using the pattern formed from the positive photosensitive resin layer in the developing step as an etching resist.
  • Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching. .
  • a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A
  • a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching.
  • a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used.
  • an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
  • Acidic etchants include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, aqueous solutions of acidic components such as phosphoric acid, acidic components and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as potassium acid.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • Alkali type etching solutions include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, or aqueous solutions of alkali components such as organic amine salts such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate.
  • alkali components such as organic amine salts such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate.
  • a mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the pattern used as an etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and a portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a process of cleaning the support having the etched conductive layer (cleaning process) and a support having the etched conductive layer as necessary.
  • You may perform the process (drying process) of drying a body.
  • the cleaning step for example, the substrate may be cleaned with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.).
  • air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (preferably about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted for drying.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said resist pattern using peeling liquid after the said etching process.
  • the patterned positive photosensitive resin layer remains. If the positive photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer (resist pattern) is preferably added to the stripping solution being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. Examples thereof include a method of immersing the base material having 5 to 30 minutes.
  • an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And a stripping solution dissolved in a mixed solution thereof.
  • a stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication may repeat an exposure process, a image development process, and an etching process twice or more as needed.
  • the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
  • the resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps.
  • the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, a part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the support.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
  • paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on a support having the conductive layer, for example, a formed wiring (the etched conductive layer), and a new method on the insulating film. Including a step of forming a conductive layer.
  • a conductive layer There is no restriction
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by a method similar to the above, or may be separately etched by a known method. Good.
  • the wiring board obtained by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have only one layer of wiring on the substrate, or may have two or more layers of wiring.
  • the support has a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and the circuit is sequentially or simultaneously applied to the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the support. It is also preferable to form.
  • the first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the support, and the second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably for a touch panel Wiring can be formed.
  • the wiring according to the present disclosure is a wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Moreover, as said wiring, a circuit wiring is mentioned preferably.
  • the wiring board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Although the use of the wiring board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a wiring board for touchscreens.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a circuit wiring manufactured using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • Examples of a method for producing a circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include the above-described method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive input device.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure is preferably an input device including a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing an input device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an organic EL display device and an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes a circuit wiring manufactured using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • Examples of a method for producing a circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include the above-described method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touchscreen which concerns on this indication is a touchscreen which has at least the wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the touch panel display device is a touch panel display device having at least wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel display device manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and more preferably includes the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
  • any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
  • a so-called in-cell type for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051
  • a so-called on-cell type for example, JP 2013-168125 A
  • OGS One Glass Solution
  • TOL Touch-on-Lens
  • GG G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.
  • Example 1 Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 1> Each component was mixed with the following composition and the photosensitive resin composition 1 was produced.
  • composition of photosensitive resin composition 1 Specific polymer 1 (the following compound, weight average molecular weight 15,000): 9.66 parts by mass (Tg of specific polymer 1 was 40 ° C. when measured by the method described above)
  • Photoacid generator compound B below: 0.25 parts by mass
  • Surfactant compound C below
  • Additive compound D below
  • Propylene glycol monomethyl ether Acetate solvent: 90.00 parts by mass
  • each structural unit represents the content (% by mass) of each structural unit.
  • the specific polymer 1 was synthesized with reference to the descriptions in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2018-031847.
  • composition of intermediate layer forming composition 1 -Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Metrolose 60SH-03): 3.5 parts by mass-Surfactant (DIC Corporation) Manufactured by Mega-Fac (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
  • the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer using a slit-like nozzle has a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m.
  • the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle.
  • the film was dried at 90 ° C. with warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressed as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
  • ⁇ Scratch test> The cover film is peeled from the photosensitive transfer material on a glass of length 10 cm ⁇ width 5 cm ⁇ thickness 0.7 mm, laminating roll temperature 90 ° C., linear pressure 0.6 MPa, linear velocity (laminate velocity) 3.6 m / The sample was transferred under the condition of min, and the temporary support was peeled off to prepare a sample.
  • a surface property tester manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd., Type: 14DR
  • As an indenter for scratching a spherical indenter (diamond, tip diameter 0.075 mm) was used.
  • the above-prepared glass substrate was set with the photosensitive transfer material surface facing upward, and the test was carried out under the conditions of a load of 5 g, a scratching speed of 1 mm / s, and a scratching distance of 50 mm.
  • the measurement environment was room temperature (23 ° C.) air.
  • a scanning white interference microscope (New View 5020 manufactured by Zygo) was used for the scratch shape observation.
  • NewView 5020 data analysis software (MetroPro)
  • the scratch depth was measured under the Micro mode, the Z-direction scan length of ⁇ 20 ⁇ m, and the other default conditions.
  • the arithmetic average value of the measurement results in five measurements was defined as the scratch depth.
  • the measurement results are shown in Table 1.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • the sample was left for 3 hours, and dip development was performed for 20 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution.
  • a sample prepared in the same manner except that it was left for 24 hours after exposure was prepared.
  • the obtained line widths of the samples with different holding times were measured at five points within the substrate surface, and the average value was used as line width data.
  • (the line width of the sample left for 3 hours / the line width of the sample left for 24 hours) was used as an index value for the holding stability. It can be said that the closer the index value is to 1, the smaller the variation in line width and the higher the process suitability even when the holding time after exposure changes.
  • the index value is preferably 0.80 to 1.20, and more preferably 0.90 to 1.10.
  • the solubility is improved by stretching, so that the line becomes thin and the index value is larger than 1. Further, when the photosensitive resin layer is a negative type, the index value becomes smaller than 1 because the solubility of the photosensitive resin layer is lowered by the holding.
  • the evaluation criteria are as follows, and the evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • A 0.90 or more and 1.10 or less.
  • B 0.80 or more and less than 0.90 or more than 1.10 and 1.20 or less.
  • C Less than 0.80 or more than 1.20.
  • the cover film was peeled off from the produced photosensitive transfer material, and laminated on the copper substrate under the lamination conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminate velocity) of 1.0 m / min.
  • a laminating roll temperature 100 ° C.
  • a linear pressure 100 MPa
  • a linear velocity 1.0 m / min.
  • the laminate of the copper substrate / photosensitive layer / intermediate layer was cut into 4.0 cm ⁇ 10 cm. A sample was made. The copper substrate side of the sample was fixed on a data base.
  • Adhesive strength exceeds 0.098 N / cm.
  • B Adhesion strength is 0.020 N / cm to 0.098 N / cm.
  • C Adhesion force is less than 0.020 N / cm.
  • Example 2 In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 2 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 2 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • composition of intermediate layer forming composition 2 ⁇ Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass ⁇ Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass ⁇ Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Metrose 60SH-15): 3.5 parts by mass ⁇ Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation) MegaFuck (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
  • Example 3 On the PET (A), the composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 was applied in an amount to give a dry film thickness of 1.0 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle. After the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is dried, the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is dried on the intermediate layer forming composition 1 using a slit nozzle, and the total dry film thickness is 2.0 ⁇ m. Was applied in an amount. After the second intermediate layer forming composition 1 was dried, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in such an amount that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. Thereafter, the film was dried with 100 ° C. warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressure bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material. The obtained photosensitive transfer material was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 4 Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 3>
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 3 was prepared in the same manner as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 3 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
  • a photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed. Evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 4 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 4 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
  • Example 6 The photosensitive transfer material was formed like Example 3 except having changed the composition of a table
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 7 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 7 is an intermediate layer forming composition.
  • a photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 8 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 8 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
  • a photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition to be applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
  • Example 9 The photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 ⁇ m, which is a cover film, using a slit-like nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. It dried with 90 degreeC warm air.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 4 was applied and dried on the photosensitive resin composition layer in such an amount that the dry film thickness was 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • middle layer formation was apply
  • PET (A) was pressure-bonded as a temporary support.
  • Example 10 A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • the composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 was applied in an amount of a dry film thickness of 3.0 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle. After the intermediate layer forming composition 1 was dried, the photosensitive resin composition 2 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. The film was dried with 100 ° C. warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressed as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
  • the photosensitive resin layer formed in Comparative Example 1 is a negative photosensitive resin layer.
  • the obtained photosensitive transfer material was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1.
  • Example 2 (Comparative Example 2) In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer forming composition 3 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • Example 3 (Comparative Example 3)
  • a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 45 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1.
  • the evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 5 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • Example 4 a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 6 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition 6 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
  • intermediate layer: 1 / second intermediate layer: 3 in the column of “intermediate layer forming composition” indicates that “the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is used for forming the intermediate layer, The intermediate layer forming composition 3 was used for forming the second intermediate layer.
  • Abbreviations in Table 1 are as follows.
  • HPMC Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • HPC Hydroxypropyl cellulose
  • PVA Polyvinyl alcohol
  • HEC Hydroxyethyl cellulose
  • Example 101 Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 ⁇ m thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition. A film was formed with a thickness of 200 nm to obtain a circuit formation substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). After peeling off the temporary support, the photomask is intermediated using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG.
  • pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction. Contact exposure was performed in contact with the layer.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray portion G is a light shielding portion
  • the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining positive photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (10% by mass sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board. As a result, a circuit wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
  • Example 102 to 110 Each of the photosensitive transfer materials obtained in Examples 2 to 10 was used and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 101. As a result, there was no peeling or chipping and the pattern was clean.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Manufacturing Of Printed Circuit Boards (AREA)

Abstract

A photosensitive transfer material which sequentially comprises a temporary support body, an intermediate layer and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, and which is configured such that the temporary support body and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other and the surface of the intermediate layer, said surface being in contact with the temporary support body, has a scratch depth of less than 0.40 μm in a scratch test as measured at a scratching rate of 1 mm/s with an indenter tip diameter of 0.075 mm under a load of 5 g; a method for producing this photosensitive transfer material; a method for producing a resist pattern, which uses this photosensitive transfer material; a method for producing a circuit wiring line; a touch panel; and a touch panel display device.

Description

感光性転写材料、感光性転写材料の製造方法、レジストパターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置Photosensitive transfer material, photosensitive transfer material manufacturing method, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
 本開示は、感光性転写材料、感光性転写材料の製造方法、レジストパターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a photosensitive transfer material, a method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material, a method for manufacturing a resist pattern, a method for manufacturing circuit wiring, a touch panel, and a touch panel display device.
 例えば、静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電性層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
For example, in a display device (such as an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device and a liquid crystal display device) provided with a touch panel such as a capacitive input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part, a peripheral wiring portion, and a take-out wiring portion A conductive layer pattern such as wiring is provided inside the touch panel.
In general, a patterned layer is formed by a photosensitive resin composition layer provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material because the number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape is small. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 例えば、特許第2832409号公報には、少なくとも、(1)支持体、(2)上記支持体上に設けられた膜厚0.1~5μmの中間層、(3)上記中間層上に設けられたカルボキシル基含有バインダーを含有する光重合性樹脂層、を含む光重合性樹脂材料において、上記中間層にヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースを含むことを特徴とする光重合性樹脂材料が開示されている。
 特開2016-57632号公報には、(A)メタクレゾール及びパラクレゾールから得られるノボラック型フェノール樹脂と、(B)オルトクレゾールから得られるノボラック型フェノール樹脂と、(C)光により酸を発生する化合物と、を含有するポジ型感光性樹脂組成物が開示されている。
For example, Japanese Patent No. 2832409 discloses at least (1) a support, (2) an intermediate layer having a film thickness of 0.1 to 5 μm provided on the support, and (3) provided on the intermediate layer. A photopolymerizable resin material comprising a photopolymerizable resin layer containing a carboxyl group-containing binder, wherein the intermediate layer contains hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is disclosed.
JP-A-2016-57632 discloses (A) a novolak-type phenol resin obtained from metacresol and para-cresol, (B) a novolac-type phenol resin obtained from ortho-cresol, and (C) an acid generated by light. And a positive photosensitive resin composition containing the compound.
 感光性転写材料を用いて基板上にポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成する際において、感光性転写材料を基板に貼り付けることにより、基板と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、仮支持体とをこの順に少なくとも有する積層体が形成される。このような積層体を露光した後に、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像することによりレジストパターンが形成される。
 ここで、得られるレジストパターンの解像度の向上等を目的として、上記露光において、上記仮支持体を剥離した後に、積層体の仮支持体が剥離された側の面に、パターンを有するフォトマスク(単に「マスク」ともいう。)を接触させて露光(「コンタクト露光」ともいう。)を行うことが検討されている。
 上記のような、マスクを仮支持体の剥離後の積層体に接触させて露光を行う場合には、積層体に含まれる成分によりマスクが汚染されてしまう場合があった。
When forming the positive photosensitive resin layer on the substrate using the photosensitive transfer material, the substrate, the positive photosensitive resin layer, and the temporary support are formed by attaching the photosensitive transfer material to the substrate. A laminate having at least this order is formed. After such a laminate is exposed, the positive photosensitive resin layer is developed to form a resist pattern.
Here, for the purpose of improving the resolution of the obtained resist pattern, etc., in the above exposure, after peeling off the temporary support, a photomask having a pattern on the surface of the laminate from which the temporary support is peeled ( It has been studied to perform exposure (also referred to as “contact exposure”) by bringing it into contact with only a “mask”.
When exposure is performed by bringing the mask into contact with the laminated body from which the temporary support has been peeled as described above, the mask may be contaminated with components contained in the laminated body.
 本開示に係る実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、コンタクト露光時のフォトマスクの汚染が抑制される感光性転写材料及びその製造方法を提供することである。
 また、本開示に係る別の実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記感光性転写材料を用いたレジストパターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by the embodiment according to the present disclosure is to provide a photosensitive transfer material in which contamination of a photomask during contact exposure is suppressed, and a method for manufacturing the same.
Another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present disclosure is to provide a resist pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, a touch panel, and a touch panel display device using the photosensitive transfer material. is there.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体と、
 中間層と、
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順で有し、
 上記仮支持体と上記中間層とが接しており、
 上記中間層の上記仮支持体と接する側の表面における、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、圧子の先端径0.075mm、荷重5gにより測定した引っ掻き試験の引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満である、
 感光性転写材料。
<2> 上記中間層が、セルロースエーテル化合物を含む、上記<1>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<3> 上記中間層が、粒子を更に含む、上記<1>又は<2>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<4> 上記中間層に含まれる上記粒子の平均粒子径が、1nm~200nmである、上記<3>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<5> 上記中間層と上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層と接する第二の中間層を更に含み、
 上記第二の中間層が、セルロースエーテル化合物及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む、上記<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<6> 上記第二の中間層が、粒子を更に含む、上記<5>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<7> 上記第二の中間層に含まれる上記粒子の平均粒子径が、1nm~200nmである、上記<6>に記載の感光性転写材料。
<8> 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含む、上記<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料。
<9> 仮支持体上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
 上記中間層形成用組成物に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程を含む、
 上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の製造方法。
<10> カバーフィルム上に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程、
 上記感光性樹脂組成物上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
 上記中間層形成用組成物上に仮支持体を貼り付ける工程を含む、
 上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の製造方法。
<11> 基板に対し、上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
 仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 上記露光する工程後の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む
 レジストパターンの製造方法。
<12> 基板に対し、上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
 仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、
 上記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域における上記基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
 回路配線の製造方法。
<13> 上記<1>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の感光性転写材料を用いて作製した回路配線を備えるタッチパネル。
<14> 上記<13>に記載のタッチパネルを備えるタッチパネル表示装置。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> a temporary support;
The middle layer,
A positive photosensitive resin layer in this order,
The temporary support and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other;
On the surface of the intermediate layer on the side in contact with the temporary support, the scratch depth of the scratch test measured by a scratch rate of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g is less than 0.40 μm.
Photosensitive transfer material.
<2> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1>, wherein the intermediate layer contains a cellulose ether compound.
<3> The photosensitive transfer material according to <1> or <2>, wherein the intermediate layer further includes particles.
<4> The photosensitive transfer material according to <3>, wherein the particles contained in the intermediate layer have an average particle diameter of 1 nm to 200 nm.
<5> A second intermediate layer in contact with the positive photosensitive resin layer is further included between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer,
The photosensitive layer according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the second intermediate layer contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group. Transfer material.
<6> The photosensitive transfer material according to <5>, wherein the second intermediate layer further contains particles.
<7> The photosensitive transfer material according to <6>, wherein the average particle size of the particles contained in the second intermediate layer is 1 nm to 200 nm.
<8> Any of the above <1> to <7>, wherein the positive photosensitive resin layer comprises a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. The photosensitive transfer material as described in any one.
<9> a step of applying a composition for forming an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and
Including a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition,
The method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8> above.
<10> a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition on the cover film;
Applying an intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition; and
Including a step of attaching a temporary support on the intermediate layer forming composition,
The method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8> above.
<11> A step of bringing the positive photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8> above into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
And developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a resist pattern in this order.
<12> a step of bringing the positive photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8> into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
Developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern;
And a step of etching the substrate in a region where the resist pattern is not disposed, in this order.
<13> A touch panel provided with circuit wiring produced using the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of <1> to <8>.
<14> A touch panel display device comprising the touch panel according to <13>.
 本開示に係る実施形態によれば、コンタクト露光時のフォトマスクの汚染が抑制される感光性転写材料及びその製造方法を提供することができる。
 また、本開示に係る別の実施形態によれば、上記感光性転写材料を用いたレジストパターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置を提供することができる。
According to the embodiment according to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer material in which contamination of a photomask during contact exposure is suppressed and a method for manufacturing the same.
Moreover, according to another embodiment which concerns on this indication, the manufacturing method of the resist pattern using the said photosensitive transfer material, the manufacturing method of circuit wiring, a touchscreen, and a touchscreen display apparatus can be provided.
図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. 図2は、パターンAを示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern A. 図3は、パターンBを示す概略図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 本開示における基(原子団)の表記について、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本開示において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本開示中に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、一つの数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本開示中に記載されている数値範囲において、その数値範囲の上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
 本開示において、「(メタ)アクリル酸」は、アクリル酸及びメタクリル酸の両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレート及びメタクリレートの両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリロイル基」は、アクリロイル基及びメタクリロイル基の両方を包含する概念である。
 本開示において、ポジ型感光性樹脂層等の層中の各成分の量は、各成分に該当する物質が層中に複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、層中に存在する上記複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 また、本開示中の「工程」の用語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても、その工程の所期の目的が達成されれば本用語に含まれる。
 また、本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 更に、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。GPCによる重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
 本開示において、全固形分量とは、組成物における溶剤等の揮発性成分を除いた成分の全質量をいう。
 本開示における図面中、同一の構成には同一符号を付して詳細な説明は省略する。
 本開示において、「光」は、γ線、β線、電子線、紫外線、可視光線、赤外線といった活性エネルギー線を包含する概念である。
 本開示における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線、X線、及びEUV(Extreme ultraviolet)光等による露光のみならず、電子線、及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による露光も含む。
Hereinafter, the contents of the present disclosure will be described. In addition, although it demonstrates referring an accompanying drawing, a code | symbol may be abbreviate | omitted.
Regarding the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present disclosure, the notation that does not indicate substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent and those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In the present disclosure, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In the numerical ranges described stepwise in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value of another numerical description. . Further, in the numerical ranges described in the present disclosure, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
In the present disclosure, “(meth) acrylic acid” is a concept including both acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, “(meth) acrylate” is a concept including both acrylate and methacrylate, The “) acryloyl group” is a concept including both an acryloyl group and a methacryloyl group.
In the present disclosure, the amount of each component in a layer such as a positive photosensitive resin layer is such that when a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the layer, the plurality of substances present in the layer unless otherwise specified. Means the total amount.
In addition, the term “process” in the present disclosure is not limited to an independent process, and even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes, it is included in this term if the intended purpose of the process is achieved. It is.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “wt%” are synonymous, and “part by mass” and “part by weight” are synonymous.
Furthermore, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (both trade names manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified. The molecular weight was detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer and converted using polystyrene as a standard substance. For the measurement of the weight average molecular weight by GPC, HLC (registered trademark) -8220GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) was used as a measuring device, and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, Tosoh was used as a column. Super HZ4000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ2000 (4.6 mm ID × 15 cm, Tosoh Corporation) )) Each in series, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) can be used as the eluent. The calibration curve is “Standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “ It can be produced using any of the seven samples of “A-2500” and “A-1000”.
In the present disclosure, the total solid content means the total mass of components excluding volatile components such as a solvent in the composition.
In the drawings of the present disclosure, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
In the present disclosure, “light” is a concept including active energy rays such as γ rays, β rays, electron beams, ultraviolet rays, visible rays, and infrared rays.
The “exposure” in the present disclosure is not limited to exposure using an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays, X-rays, EUV (Extreme ultraviolet) light, etc. And exposure with particle beams such as an ion beam.
(感光性転写材料)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と、中間層と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順で有し、上記仮支持体と上記中間層とが接しており、上記中間層の上記仮支持体と接する側の表面における、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、圧子の先端径0.075mm、荷重5gにより測定した引っ掻き試験の引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満である。
(Photosensitive transfer material)
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, and the temporary support and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other. The scratch depth of the scratch test measured with a scratch speed of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface of the layer in contact with the temporary support is less than 0.40 μm.
 本発明者らは、特許第2832409号公報又は特開2016-57632号公報に記載の感光性転写材料を用いてコンタクト露光を行った場合、マスクに汚染が発生する場合があることを見出した。
 特許第2832409号公報に記載の感光性転写材料は、ネガ型感光性樹脂層を有する感光性転写材料であり、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する感光性転写材料と比較して柔らかいため、引っ掻き深さが深くなりやすい。また、コンタクト露光時にフォトマスクと中間層が接着されることにより、フォトマスクの剥離時に感光性樹脂層が基板から剥がれてしまい、中間層及び感光性樹脂層の成分によるマスクの汚染が発生してしまう場合がある。
 また、特開2016-57632号公報に記載の感光性転写材料は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を含むが、引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満である硬い中間層を有しないため、感光性転写材料の塑性変形が抑制されにくく、ポジ型感光性樹脂層に含まれる成分によるマスクの汚染が発生してしまう場合がある。
 そこで本発明者らは、鋭意検討した結果、本開示に係る感光性転写材料においては、仮支持体と接する側の表面における、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、圧子の先端径0.075mm、荷重5gにより測定した引っ掻き試験の引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満である中間層を有することにより、コンタクト露光時のマスクの汚染が抑制されることを見出した。
 これは、中間層の引っ掻き深さが上記範囲内であることにより、コンタクト露光時の感光性転写材料の塑性変形が抑制されるためであると考えられる。
The present inventors have found that when contact exposure is performed using a photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent No. 2832409 or Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-57632, contamination of the mask may occur.
The photosensitive transfer material described in Japanese Patent No. 2832409 is a photosensitive transfer material having a negative photosensitive resin layer, and is softer than a photosensitive transfer material having a positive photosensitive resin layer. It tends to be deep. In addition, when the photomask and the intermediate layer are bonded during contact exposure, the photosensitive resin layer is peeled off from the substrate when the photomask is peeled off, resulting in contamination of the mask due to the components of the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer. May end up.
The photosensitive transfer material described in JP-A-2016-57632 includes a positive photosensitive resin layer, but does not have a hard intermediate layer having a scratch depth of less than 0.40 μm. The plastic deformation is difficult to be suppressed, and the mask may be contaminated with components contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer.
Therefore, as a result of intensive studies, the present inventors have determined that the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a scratching speed of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface in contact with the temporary support. It has been found that by having an intermediate layer having a scratch depth of less than 0.40 μm in the measured scratch test, contamination of the mask during contact exposure is suppressed.
This is considered to be because the plastic layer of the photosensitive transfer material during contact exposure is suppressed when the scratch depth of the intermediate layer is within the above range.
 このように、本開示によれば、コンタクト露光時のマスクの汚染が抑制される。
 コンタクト露光を行うことによる利点として、現像後に得られるレジストパターンの形状が良好となる点が挙げられる。
 例えば、本発明者らは、従来行われているように、仮支持体上にマスクを配置して露光を行った場合、露光光が基板又はポジ型感光性樹脂層の界面で反射して生じる反射波と入射波との干渉により生じた定在波によって感光性樹脂層が露光され、現像後に得られるレジストパターンの側面部分に階段状の切れ込みが発生することを見出した。
 また本発明者らは、上記階段状の切れ込みの発生を抑制するためには、マスクと感光性樹脂層との距離をできるだけ小さくすることが有効であると考え、仮支持体を剥離してコンタクト露光を行うことが好ましいと考えた。
 すなわち、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、コンタクト露光時のマスクの汚染が抑制され、かつ、コンタクト露光を行うことにより上記階段状の切れ込みの発生が抑制されるという点からは、例えば微小なレジストパターンの形成を行う場合にも有用であると考えられる。
 以下、本開示に係る感光性転写材料について、詳細に説明する。
Thus, according to the present disclosure, contamination of the mask during contact exposure is suppressed.
An advantage of performing contact exposure is that the shape of the resist pattern obtained after development is good.
For example, when the present inventors perform exposure by arranging a mask on a temporary support as conventionally performed, the exposure light is reflected at the interface of the substrate or the positive photosensitive resin layer. It has been found that the photosensitive resin layer is exposed by a standing wave generated by the interference between the reflected wave and the incident wave, and a step-like cut occurs in the side surface portion of the resist pattern obtained after development.
Further, the present inventors consider that it is effective to reduce the distance between the mask and the photosensitive resin layer as much as possible in order to suppress the occurrence of the step-like cut, and the temporary support is peeled off to make contact. It was considered preferable to perform exposure.
That is, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has, for example, a minute amount from the viewpoint that the contamination of the mask at the time of contact exposure is suppressed and the occurrence of the stepped cut is suppressed by performing the contact exposure. It is also considered useful when forming a resist pattern.
Hereinafter, the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
 図1は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示している。図1に示す感光性転写材料100は、仮支持体10と、中間層12と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
 中間層12は、仮支持体10と接しており、上記仮支持体と接する側の表面における引っ掻き深さが0.40μm以上である。
FIG. 1 schematically illustrates an example of a layer configuration of a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. In the photosensitive transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a positive photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
The intermediate layer 12 is in contact with the temporary support 10, and the scratch depth on the surface in contact with the temporary support is 0.40 μm or more.
<中間層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、仮支持体と接し、上記仮支持体と接する側の表面における引っ掻き深さが0.40μm以上である中間層を、仮支持体とポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に有する。
 中間層は、仮支持体の剥離後の感光性転写材料において最外層となる層である。
<Intermediate layer>
In the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, an intermediate layer that is in contact with the temporary support and has a scratch depth of 0.40 μm or more on the surface in contact with the temporary support is used as the temporary support and the positive photosensitive resin layer. Have between.
An intermediate | middle layer is a layer used as the outermost layer in the photosensitive transfer material after peeling of a temporary support body.
〔引っ掻き深さ〕
 中間層の上記仮支持体と接する側の表面における、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、圧子の先端径0.075mm、荷重5gにより測定した引っ掻き試験の引っ掻き深さは、0.40μm未満であり、0.38μm未満であることが好ましく、0.36μm未満であることがより好ましい。
 中間層の上記引っ掻き深さの下限としては、特に限定されず、0.20μm以上であればよい。
[Scratch depth]
The scratch depth of the scratch test measured with a scratch rate of 1 mm / s, the tip diameter of the indenter 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g on the surface of the intermediate layer in contact with the temporary support is less than 0.40 μm. It is preferably less than 38 μm, and more preferably less than 0.36 μm.
The lower limit of the scratch depth of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited and may be 0.20 μm or more.
 上記引っ掻き深さは、下記測定方法により測定される。
 感光性転写材料から必要に応じてカバーフィルムを剥離し、ガラス板に感光性転写材料をラミネートし、その後仮支持体を中間層との境界面から剥離し中間層を露出させる。
 引っ掻き試験装置として表面性試験機(新東科学(株)製、Type:14DR)を用いる。引っ掻き傷を付ける圧子は球状圧子(ダイヤモンド、先端径0.075mm)を用いる。上記で作製したガラス基板を感光性転写材料面を上にしてセットし、荷重5g、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、引っ掻き距離50mmの条件で実施する。測定環境は室温(23℃)の大気中とする。引っ掻き傷形状観察には走査型白色干渉顕微鏡(Zygo社製、NewView5020)を使用する。NewView5020のデータ解析ソフト(MetroPro)を利用し、Microモード、Z方向スキャン長さを±20μm、それ以外は初期設定の条件で、引っ掻き傷の深さを測定する。5回の測定における測定結果の算術平均値を引っ掻き深さと定義する。
The scratch depth is measured by the following measurement method.
If necessary, the cover film is peeled off from the photosensitive transfer material, the photosensitive transfer material is laminated on a glass plate, and then the temporary support is peeled off from the boundary surface with the intermediate layer to expose the intermediate layer.
A surface property tester (Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd., Type: 14DR) is used as a scratch test device. A spherical indenter (diamond, tip diameter 0.075 mm) is used as an indenter for scratching. The above-prepared glass substrate is set with the photosensitive transfer material surface facing up, and the load is 5 g, the scratching speed is 1 mm / s, and the scratching distance is 50 mm. The measurement environment is air at room temperature (23 ° C.). A scanning white interference microscope (manufactured by Zygo, New View 5020) is used for scratch shape observation. Using the NewView 5020 data analysis software (MetroPro), the scratch depth is measured in the Micro mode, the Z-direction scan length is ± 20 μm, and the other conditions are the default settings. The arithmetic average value of the measurement results in five measurements is defined as the scratch depth.
〔中間層の物性〕
 中間層は、上述の引っ掻き深さが上記範囲内となる限り、どのような材料により形成されていてもよいが、現像により除去される層であることが好ましい。
 中間層は、現像により除去されやすいことが好ましい観点から、水溶性又は水分散性の層であることが好ましい。
 本開示において、水溶性とは、25℃の水100質量部に対する対象物質の溶解量が0.1質量部以上であることを意味する。
 本開示において、水分散性とは、25℃の水100質量部と対象物質0.1質量部を混合した場合に、24時間後の沈殿物の量が0.01質量部未満であることをいう。
[Physical properties of the intermediate layer]
The intermediate layer may be formed of any material as long as the above scratch depth is within the above range, but is preferably a layer that is removed by development.
The intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble or water-dispersible layer from the viewpoint that it is preferably removed by development.
In the present disclosure, water-soluble means that the amount of the target substance dissolved in 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. is 0.1 parts by mass or more.
In the present disclosure, water dispersibility means that the amount of precipitate after 24 hours is less than 0.01 parts by mass when 100 parts by mass of water at 25 ° C. and 0.1 parts by mass of the target substance are mixed. Say.
〔セルロースエーテル化合物〕
 中間層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層との密着性、仮支持体からの剥離性等の観点から、セルロースエーテル化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 セルロースエーテル化合物とは、セルロース化合物がエーテル化された構造を有する化合物であり、セルロース化合物とは、複数の無水グルコースが重合した重合体である。
 上記セルロースエーテル化合物としては、引っ掻き試験での引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満であれば特に限定されないが、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース、エチルセルロース、エチルメチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース等が挙げられ、マスク汚染の抑制の観点から、ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースが好ましい。
[Cellulose ether compound]
The intermediate layer preferably contains a cellulose ether compound from the viewpoints of adhesion to the positive photosensitive resin layer, releasability from the temporary support, and the like.
The cellulose ether compound is a compound having a structure in which the cellulose compound is etherified, and the cellulose compound is a polymer obtained by polymerizing a plurality of anhydrous glucose.
The cellulose ether compound is not particularly limited as long as the scratch depth in the scratch test is less than 0.40 μm, and examples thereof include hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, ethylcellulose, ethylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, From the viewpoint of suppression, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose is preferred.
 上記セルロースエーテル化合物のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、100℃~200℃であることが好ましく、120℃~180℃であることがより好ましい。
 本開示において、ガラス転移温度は示差走査熱量測定(DSC)を用いて測定することができる。
 具体的な測定方法は、JIS K 7121(1987年)又はJIS K 6240(2011年)に記載の方法に順じて行う。本明細書におけるガラス転移温度は、補外ガラス転移開始温度(以下、Tigと称することがある)を用いている。
 ガラス転移温度の測定方法をより具体的に説明する。
 ガラス転移温度を求める場合、予想されるTgより約50℃低い温度にて装置が安定するまで保持した後、加熱速度:20℃/分で、ガラス転移が終了した温度よりも約30℃高い温度まで加熱し,DTA曲線又はDSC曲線を描かせる。
 補外ガラス転移開始温度(Tig)、すなわち、本明細書におけるガラス転移温度Tgは、DTA曲線又はDSC曲線における低温側のベースラインを高温側に延長した直線と、ガラス転移の階段状変化部分の曲線の勾配が最大になる点で引いた接線との交点の温度として求める。
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the cellulose ether compound is preferably 100 ° C. to 200 ° C., more preferably 120 ° C. to 180 ° C.
In the present disclosure, the glass transition temperature can be measured using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC).
The specific measurement method is performed in accordance with the method described in JIS K 7121 (1987) or JIS K 6240 (2011). As the glass transition temperature in the present specification, an extrapolated glass transition start temperature (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Tig) is used.
The method for measuring the glass transition temperature will be described more specifically.
When determining the glass transition temperature, hold at a temperature about 50 ° C. lower than the expected Tg until the device is stabilized, then at a heating rate of 20 ° C./min, a temperature about 30 ° C. higher than the temperature at which the glass transition is completed. Until the DTA curve or DSC curve is drawn.
The extrapolated glass transition start temperature (Tig), that is, the glass transition temperature Tg in the present specification, is a straight line obtained by extending the low-temperature side baseline in the DTA curve or DSC curve to the high-temperature side, and the step-like change portion of the glass transition. Calculated as the temperature of the intersection with the tangent drawn at the point where the slope of the curve is maximum.
 Tgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする特定重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method for adjusting Tg to the above-mentioned preferred range, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit, using the FOX formula as a guide, It is possible to control the Tg of the specific polymer.
About the FOX formula: Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
 上記セルロースエーテル化合物の重量平均分子量としては、現像性等の観点から、5,000~200,000が好ましく、10,000~100,000がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether compound is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
 セルロースエーテル化合物としては、市販品を用いてもよく、好ましい市販品としては、メトローズ60SH-03、メトローズ60SH-06、メトローズ60SH-15(いずれも信越化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available products may be used as the cellulose ether compound, and preferred commercial products include Metrolose 60SH-03, Metrolose 60SH-06, Metrolze 60SH-15 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 本開示における中間層は、セルロースエーテル化合物を1種単独で含んでもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 セルロースエーテル化合物の含有量は、中間層の全質量に対し、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、25質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。
 上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%以下であればよい。
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain one kind of cellulose ether compound or two or more kinds in combination.
The content of the cellulose ether compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 25% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. % Or more is particularly preferable.
The upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass or less.
〔粒子〕
 本開示における中間層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層又は後述する第二の樹脂層との密着性の向上の観点から、粒子を更に含んでもよい。
 粒子としては、無機粒子及び樹脂粒子が挙げられ、マスク汚染の抑制の観点から、シリカ粒子、アルミナ粒子又は樹脂粒子であることが好ましく、シリカ粒子又はアルミナ粒子であることがより好ましく、シリカ粒子であることが更に好ましい。
〔particle〕
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure may further include particles from the viewpoint of improving the adhesion with the positive photosensitive resin layer or the second resin layer described later.
Examples of the particles include inorganic particles and resin particles. From the viewpoint of suppression of mask contamination, silica particles, alumina particles, or resin particles are preferable, silica particles or alumina particles are more preferable, and silica particles are preferable. More preferably it is.
 無機粒子としては、無機酸化物粒子が挙げられ、例えば、シリカ、アルミナ、ジルコニア、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ゲルマニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化スズ、インジウムスズ酸化物(ITO)、酸化アンチモン、酸化セリウム等の粒子を挙げることができる。 Inorganic particles include inorganic oxide particles such as silica, alumina, zirconia, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, germanium oxide, indium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide (ITO), antimony oxide, cerium oxide, and the like. Can be mentioned.
 樹脂粒子としては例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、アクリル酸エステル、メタクリル酸エステル等のアクリル酸系モノマーの単独重合体及び共重合体、ニトロセルロース、メチルセルロース、エチルセルロース、セルロースアセテートのようなセルロース系ポリマー、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリスチレン、塩化ビニル系共重合体、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、ポリビニルピロリドン、ポリビニルブチラール、ポリビニルアルコールのようなビニル系ポリマー及びビニル化合物の共重合体、ポリエステル、ポリウレタン、ポリアミドのような縮合系ポリマー、ブタジエン-スチレン共重合体のようなゴム系熱可塑性ポリマー、エポキシ化合物のような光重合性若しくは熱重合性化合物を重合、架橋させたポリマー、メラミン化合物等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the resin particles include homopolymers and copolymers of acrylic acid monomers such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylic acid esters, and methacrylic acid esters, cellulose polymers such as nitrocellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and cellulose acetate, Polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, vinyl chloride copolymers, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers, polyvinyl polymers such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyvinyl butyral, polyvinyl alcohol and copolymers of vinyl compounds, polyesters, polyurethanes, polyamides Condensation polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, rubber thermoplastic polymers such as butadiene-styrene copolymers, polymers obtained by polymerizing and crosslinking photopolymerizable or thermopolymerizable compounds such as epoxy compounds, Emissions compounds and the like.
 粒子は、分散安定性付与のために表面を有機材料や無機材料で処理することもできる。上記粒子は、表面が親水性の粒子であることが好ましい。例えば、表面が疎水性の粒子の表面を親水化処理する等が挙げられる。 The surface of the particles can be treated with an organic material or an inorganic material in order to impart dispersion stability. The particles are preferably particles having a hydrophilic surface. For example, the surface of particles having a hydrophobic surface may be subjected to a hydrophilic treatment.
 粒子の平均粒子径は、10nm~200nmであることが好ましい。
 本開示における粒子の平均粒子径の測定方法は、電子顕微鏡により中間層中の任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、その算術平均をいう。また、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最大径を径とする。
The average particle diameter of the particles is preferably 10 nm to 200 nm.
The method for measuring the average particle size of the particles in the present disclosure refers to the arithmetic average of the particle sizes of 200 arbitrary particles in the intermediate layer using an electron microscope. When the particle shape is not spherical, the maximum diameter is taken as the diameter.
 本開示における中間層は、粒子を1種単独で含んでもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、5体積%~90体積%であることが好ましく、10体積%~80体積%であることがより好ましく、15体積%~70体積%であることが更に好ましく、20体積%~60体積%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure may contain particles alone or in combination of two or more.
The volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (the volume ratio occupied by the particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% by volume to 90% by volume with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 10% by volume to 80% by volume, more preferably 15% by volume to 70% by volume, and particularly preferably 20% by volume to 60% by volume.
〔その他の添加剤〕
 本開示における中間層は、セルロースエーテル化合物に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、後述するポジ型感光性樹脂層に用いられるその他の添加剤が好適に挙げられる。
[Other additives]
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure can contain a known additive as required in addition to the cellulose ether compound.
As other additives, other additives used for a positive photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
〔中間層の厚み〕
 上記中間層の厚みは、コンタクト露光による効果をより向上する観点から、0.1μm~10μmが好ましく、0.2μm~8μmがより好ましく、0.5μm~5μmが特に好ましい。
 また、上記中間層の厚みは、後述するポジ型感光性樹脂層の厚みより薄いことが好ましい。
[Thickness of intermediate layer]
The thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.1 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.2 μm to 8 μm, and particularly preferably 0.5 μm to 5 μm from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of contact exposure.
Moreover, it is preferable that the thickness of the said intermediate | middle layer is thinner than the thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer mentioned later.
〔中間層の形成方法〕
 中間層の形成方法は、特に制限はないが、例えば中間層形成用組成物を用いることにより形成することができる。
 具体的には、中間層に含まれる各成分、及び、溶剤を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための中間層形成用組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径5μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
 上記中間層形成用組成物を用いた中間層の形成方法の詳細については、後述する本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法において説明する。
[Method for forming intermediate layer]
The method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, and for example, the intermediate layer can be formed by using a composition for forming an intermediate layer.
Specifically, each component contained in the intermediate layer and the solvent are mixed at a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary method, and dissolved by stirring to prepare an intermediate layer forming composition for forming the intermediate layer. Can do. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 5 μm.
Details of the method for forming the intermediate layer using the intermediate layer forming composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, which will be described later.
<第二の中間層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記中間層と上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層と接する第二の中間層を更に含んでもよい。
 感光性転写材料が第二の中間層を含むことにより、露光後に時間が経過した場合であっても、現像後に得られるレジストパターンの形状(例えば、パターンの線幅など)が変化しにくくなる。
 本開示において、露光後に時間が経過した後に現像しても、レジストパターンの形状が変化しにくいという性質を、「引き置き安定性(PED(post exposure delay))に優れる」ともいう。
 また、本開示において、露光した後、現像する前に感光性転写材料を一定の時間静置しておくことを「引き置く(placing after exposure)」といい、例えば露光した後、現像する前に感光性転写材料を3時間静置しておくことを、3時間引き置きする、などという。
 第二の中間層を含むことにより、引き置き安定性に優れるという効果が得られる理由は定かではないが、例えば、ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物の露光反応による現像性の増加に対し、何らかの抑制作用を有しているのではないかと推定される。
<Second intermediate layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may further include a second intermediate layer in contact with the positive photosensitive resin layer between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
When the photosensitive transfer material includes the second intermediate layer, the resist pattern shape (for example, the line width of the pattern) obtained after development is less likely to change even when time passes after exposure.
In the present disclosure, the property that the shape of the resist pattern hardly changes even after development after a lapse of time after exposure is also referred to as “excellent placement stability (PED (post exposure delay))”.
In the present disclosure, leaving the photosensitive transfer material for a certain period of time after exposure and before development is called “placing after exposure”. For example, after exposure and before development Leaving the photosensitive transfer material for 3 hours is referred to as leaving for 3 hours.
The reason why the effect of excellent retention stability can be obtained by including the second intermediate layer is not clear, but for example, some suppression of the increase in developability due to the exposure reaction of the positive photosensitive resin composition It is presumed that it has an action.
 第二の中間層は、水溶性又は水分散性の層であることが好ましい。 The second intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble or water-dispersible layer.
〔セルロースエーテル化合物又はヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂〕
 第二の中間層は、引き置き安定性の観点から、セルロースエーテル化合物及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましい。
[Acrylic resin having cellulose ether compound or hydroxy group]
It is preferable that a 2nd intermediate | middle layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of compound chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin which has a cellulose ether compound and a hydroxyl group from a standpoint of placement stability.
-セルロースエーテル化合物-
 セルロースエーテル化合物としては、特に限定されないが、引き置き安定性向上の観点からは、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロースが好ましい。
-Cellulose ether compound-
Although it does not specifically limit as a cellulose ether compound, From a viewpoint of a standing stability improvement, a hydroxypropyl cellulose is preferable.
 上記セルロースエーテル化合物の重量平均分子量としては、現像性等の観点から、5,000~200,000が好ましく、10,000~100,000がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the cellulose ether compound is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
 上記セルロースエーテル化合物としては、市販品を用いてもよく、好ましい市販品としては、HPC-SSL(日本曹達(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available products may be used as the cellulose ether compound, and preferred commercially available products include HPC-SSL (manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.).
-ヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂-
 ヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂としては、ヒドロキシ基を有するモノマー単位を有するアクリル樹脂が好ましい。
 上記ヒドロキシ基を有するモノマー単位としては、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、等のヒドロキシアルキルアクリレート、アルキレングリコールモノアクリレート、ポリアルキレングリコールモノアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート等が挙げられる。
-Acrylic resin with hydroxy group-
As the acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, an acrylic resin having a monomer unit having a hydroxy group is preferred.
Examples of the monomer unit having a hydroxy group include hydroxyalkyl acrylates such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl (meth) acrylate, alkylene glycol monoacrylate, and polyalkylene. Examples include glycol monoacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, and dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
 上記アクリル樹脂の重量平均分子量としては、現像性等の観点から、5,000~200,000が好ましく、10,000~100,000がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is preferably from 5,000 to 200,000, more preferably from 10,000 to 100,000, from the viewpoint of developability and the like.
 ヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂は、その他の構成単位として、後述する特定重合体における酸基を有する構成単位B、及び、構成単位C等を有していてもよい。 The acrylic resin having a hydroxy group may have, as other structural units, a structural unit B having an acid group in a specific polymer described later, a structural unit C, and the like.
 第二の中間層は、セルロースエーテル化合物及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を1種単独で含んでもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 セルロースエーテル化合物及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物の含有量(2種以上含む場合は、合計含有量)は、第二の中間層の全質量に対し、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、20質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、25質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。
 上記含有量の上限は特に限定されず、100質量%以下であればよい。
The second intermediate layer may contain at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group, or a combination of two or more.
The content of at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group (when two or more compounds are included, the total content) is based on the total mass of the second intermediate layer, It is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 25% by mass or more.
The upper limit of the content is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass or less.
〔粒子〕
 第二の中間層は、中間層とポジ型感光性樹脂層との密着性の観点から、粒子を含むことが好ましい。
 第二の中間層に含まれる粒子は、上述した中間層に含まれる粒子と同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
〔particle〕
The second intermediate layer preferably contains particles from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
The particles contained in the second intermediate layer are synonymous with the particles contained in the intermediate layer described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
<<その他の添加剤>>
 第二の中間層は、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、後述するポジ型感光性樹脂層に用いられるその他の添加剤が好適に挙げられる。
<< Other additives >>
A 2nd intermediate | middle layer can contain a well-known additive as needed.
As other additives, other additives used for a positive photosensitive resin layer described later are preferably exemplified.
 第二の中間層の厚みは、引き置き安定性及びコンタクト露光による効果をより向上する観点から、0.1μm~10μmが好ましく、0.2μm~8μmがより好ましく、0.5μm~5μmが特に好ましい。
 また、感光性転写材料が第二の中間層を有する場合、中間層と第二の中間層の合計厚みは、コンタクト露光による効果をさらに向上する観点から、0.1μm~10μmが好ましく、0.2μm~8μmがより好ましく、0.5μm~5μmが特に好ましい。
The thickness of the second intermediate layer is preferably from 0.1 μm to 10 μm, more preferably from 0.2 μm to 8 μm, and particularly preferably from 0.5 μm to 5 μm, from the viewpoint of further improving the placement stability and the effect of contact exposure. .
When the photosensitive transfer material has a second intermediate layer, the total thickness of the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer is preferably 0.1 μm to 10 μm from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of contact exposure. 2 μm to 8 μm is more preferable, and 0.5 μm to 5 μm is particularly preferable.
〔第二の中間層の形成方法〕
 第二の中間層の形成方法は、特に制限はないが、例えば第二の中間層形成用組成物を用いることにより形成することができる。
 具体的には、第二の中間層に含まれる各成分、及び、溶剤を所定の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための第二の中間層形成用組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径5μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
 上記第二の中間層形成用組成物を用いた中間層の形成方法の詳細については、後述する本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法において説明する。
[Method for forming second intermediate layer]
Although the formation method in particular of a 2nd intermediate | middle layer does not have a restriction | limiting, For example, it can form by using the composition for 2nd intermediate | middle layer formation.
Specifically, each component contained in the second intermediate layer and the solvent are mixed at a predetermined ratio and in an arbitrary manner, stirred and dissolved to form an intermediate layer. A composition can be prepared. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 5 μm.
Details of the method for forming the intermediate layer using the second intermediate layer forming composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described later.
<仮支持体>
 仮支持体は、中間層及びポジ型感光性樹脂層を支持し、中間層から剥離可能な支持体である。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
 本開示において、仮支持体は、仮支持体の剥離時に仮支持体と共に剥離される層を有していてもよい。
<Temporary support>
The temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer and is peelable from the intermediate layer.
Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoints of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
In the present disclosure, the temporary support may have a layer that is peeled off together with the temporary support when the temporary support is peeled off.
 仮支持体の厚みは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, and more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support is selected according to the material from the viewpoints of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, light transmittance required in the first exposure process, etc. do it.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A preferred embodiment of the temporary support is described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
<ポジ型感光性樹脂層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する。
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含有することが好ましい。
 また、本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層は、化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩やオキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性エネルギー線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、上記特定重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性エネルギー線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Positive photosensitive resin layer>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has a positive photosensitive resin layer.
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator.
In addition, the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer.
The photoacid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below are produced in response to active energy rays (active rays), and the deprotection of the protected acid groups in the specific polymer. Since it acts as a catalyst, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, for example, a large value such as the power of 10, which is a so-called chemical High sensitivity is obtained as a result of amplification.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to active energy rays, a carboxy group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less and does not correspond to a chemical amplification type. .
〔酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体を含む重合体成分〕
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位(「構成単位A」ともいう。)を有する重合体(「特定重合体」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、構成単位Aを有する重合体に加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位Aを有する重合体及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 上記特定重合体は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸性物質の作用により、特定重合体中の酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aが脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、硬化反応が可能となる。
[Polymer component including a polymer having a structural unit having an acid-decomposable and protected acid group]
The positive photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer (also referred to as “specific polymer”) having a structural unit (also referred to as “structural unit A”) having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group. Is preferred.
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain other polymers in addition to the polymer having the structural unit A. In the present disclosure, the polymer having the structural unit A and other polymers are also collectively referred to as “polymer component”.
In the specific polymer, the structural unit A having an acid-decomposable protected acid group in the specific polymer undergoes a deprotection reaction to be an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acidic substance generated by exposure. This acid group enables a curing reaction.
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、更に、酸分解性で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記重合体成分に含まれる全ての重合体がそれぞれ、後述する酸基を有する構成単位を少なくとも有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 また、上記化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物は、更に、これら以外の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示における上記重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する界面活性剤、架橋剤及び分散剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、上記重合体成分に含まないものとする。
The positive photosensitive resin layer may further contain a polymer other than the polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by acid decomposability.
Moreover, it is preferable that all the polymers contained in the said polymer component are polymers which have at least the structural unit which has the acid group mentioned later, respectively.
The chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition may further contain a polymer other than these. Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure means a material including other polymers added as necessary. In addition, even if it is a high molecular compound, the compound applicable to surfactant, a crosslinking agent, and a dispersing agent mentioned later shall not be contained in the said polymer component.
 特定重合体は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレンに由来する構成単位や、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。 The specific polymer is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof. In addition, you may have structural units other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester, for example, the structural unit derived from styrene, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、現像液への溶解性及び転写性等の観点から、特定重合体として、上記構成単位Aとして上記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位を有する重合体(以下、「重合体A-1」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましく、特定重合体として、上記構成単位Aとして上記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位、及び、酸基を有する重合体を含むことがより好ましい。
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層に含まれる特定重合体は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
The positive photosensitive resin layer has a structural unit represented by any one of the above formulas A1 to A3 as the structural unit A as a specific polymer from the viewpoint of solubility in a developer, transferability, and the like. It is preferable that a polymer (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer A-1”) is included. As the specific polymer, as the structural unit A, a structural unit represented by any one of the above formulas A1 to A3, and It is more preferable to include a polymer having an acid group.
The specific polymer contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer may be one type or two or more types.
-構成単位A-
 上記重合体成分は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを少なくとも有する重合体A-1を含むことが好ましい。上記重合体成分が構成単位Aを有する重合体を含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型のポジ型感光性樹脂層とすることができる。
 本開示における「酸分解性基で保護された酸基」は、酸基及び酸分解性基として公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。具体的な酸基としては、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性水酸基が好ましく挙げられる。また、酸分解性で保護された酸基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、式A3により表される基で保護されたエステル基、テトラヒドロピラニルエステル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニルエステル基等のアセタール系官能基)や酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチルエステル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルカーボネート基等の第三級アルキルカーボネート基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、上記酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
 また、酸分解性基としては、得られる回路配線における線幅のバラツキが抑制される観点から、分子量が300以下の酸分解性基であることが好ましい。
-Structural unit A-
The polymer component preferably includes a polymer A-1 having at least a structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group. When the polymer component contains a polymer having the structural unit A, an extremely sensitive chemical amplification positive type positive photosensitive resin layer can be obtained.
As the “acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group” in the present disclosure, those known as an acid group and an acid-decomposable group can be used, and are not particularly limited. Specific examples of the acid group preferably include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group. The acid group protected by acid decomposability is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an ester group, a tetrahydropyranyl ester group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl ester group protected by a group represented by the formula A3). An acetal functional group such as tert-butyl ester group or a tertiary alkyl carbonate group such as tert-butyl carbonate group or the like. it can.
Among these, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of an acetal.
The acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in line width in the obtained circuit wiring.
 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位を含むことが好ましく、後述する式A3-2により表される構成単位を含むことがより好ましい。 The structural unit A having an acid group protected with an acid-decomposable group preferably contains a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas A1 to A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. More preferably, it includes a structural unit represented by -2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

 
 式A1中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR11及びR12のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R13はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、R15は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A2中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR21及びR22のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21又はR22と、R23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R24はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基又はシクロアルキル基を表し、mは0~3の整数を表す。
 式A3中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、Yは-S-、又は-O-を表す。
In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, and R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may combine to form a cyclic ether, and each R 24 independently represents a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, Represents an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or Represents an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, Y represents —S— or —O—.
<<式A1により表される構成単位の好ましい態様>>
 式A1中、R11又はR12がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R11又はR12がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R11及びR12は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A1中、R13は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R11~R13におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A1中、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A1中、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、単結合又はアルキレン基、-C(=O)O-、-C(=O)NR-、-O-又はこれらの組み合わせが好ましく、単結合がより好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖状でも分岐を有していても環状構造を有していてもよく、置換基を有していてもよい。アルキレン基の炭素数は1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。Xが-C(=O)O-を含む場合、-C(=O)O-に含まれる炭素原子と、RB4が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Xが-C(=O)NR-を含む場合、-C(=O)NR-に含まれる炭素原子と、R14が結合した炭素原子とが直接結合する態様が好ましい。Rはアルキル基又は水素原子を表し、炭素数1~4のアルキル基又は水素原子が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。
 式A1中、R11~R13を含む基と、Xとは、互いにパラ位で結合することが好ましい。
 式A1中、R15は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A1中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
<< Preferred Aspect of Structural Unit Represented by Formula A1 >>
In Formula A1, when R 11 or R 12 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 11 or R 12 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 11 and R 12 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A1, R 13 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 11 to R 13 may have a substituent.
In Formula A1, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 11 or R 12 and R 13 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula A1, X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and is a single bond or an alkylene group, —C (═O) O—, —C (═O) NR N —, —O—, or a combination thereof. Are preferable, and a single bond is more preferable. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic, and may have a substituent. The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms. When X B contains —C (═O) O—, an embodiment in which the carbon atom contained in —C (═O) O— and the carbon atom bonded to R B4 are directly bonded is preferable. When containing, -C (= O) NR N - - X 1 is -C (= O) NR N and carbon atoms contained in a mode in which the carbon atom to which R 14 is bonded is directly bonded is preferable. R N represents an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom, preferably an alkyl group or a hydrogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
In Formula A1, the group containing R 11 to R 13 and X 1 are preferably bonded to each other at the para position.
In formula A1, R 15 represents a substituent, preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A1, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A1中、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、重合体A-1のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、重合体A-1に含まれる構成単位Aの全含有量に対し、式A1におけるR14が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A中の、式A1におけるR14が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula A1, R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be further lowered.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R 14 in Formula A1 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total content of the structural unit A contained in the polymer A-1.
In addition, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 14 in formula A1 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
 式A1で表される構成単位の中でも、パターン形状の変形抑制の観点から、下記式A1-2で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula A1, the structural unit represented by the following formula A1-2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing deformation of the pattern shape.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 
 式A1-2中、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RB5~RB11はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、RB12は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A1-2中、RB4は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A1-2中、RB5~RB11は、水素原子が好ましい。
 式A1-2、RB12は置換基を表し、アルキル基又はハロゲン原子が好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~4がより好ましい。
 式A1-2中、nは0~4の整数を表し、0又は1が好ましく、0がより好ましい。
In Formula A1-2, R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R B5 to R B11 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R B12 represents a substituent, and n Represents an integer of 0-4.
In formula A1-2, R B4 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A1-2, R B5 to R B11 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
Formulas A1-2 and R B12 represent a substituent, and are preferably an alkyl group or a halogen atom. The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A1-2, n represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably 0.
 式A1で表される構成単位A1の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。 As preferred specific examples of the structural unit A1 represented by the formula A1, the following structural units can be exemplified.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 
<<式A2により表される構成単位の好ましい態様>>
 式A2中、R21及びR22がアルキル基の場合、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R21及びR22がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R11及びR12は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましく、少なくとも一方が水素原子であることがより好ましい。
 上記一般式A2中、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよい。
 式A2中、R24はそれぞれ独立に、炭素数1~10のアルキル基又は炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基であることが好ましい。R24は、R24と同様の基により更に置換されていてもよい。
 式A2中、mは1又は2であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。
<< Preferred Aspect of Structural Unit Represented by Formula A2 >>
In the formula A2, when R 21 and R 22 are alkyl groups, alkyl groups having 1 to 10 carbon atoms are preferable. When R 21 and R 22 are aryl groups, a phenyl group is preferable. R 11 and R 12 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and more preferably at least one is a hydrogen atom.
In the general formula A2, R 23 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether.
In formula A2, each R 24 is preferably independently an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. R 24 may be further substituted with the same group as R 24 .
In formula A2, m is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
 式A2で表される構成単位A2の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、RB4は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit A2 represented by the formula A2 include the following structural units. R B4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 
<<式A3により表される構成単位の好ましい態様>>
 式A3中、R31又はR32がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R31又はR32がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R31及びR32は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A3中、R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R31~R33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A3中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、Yは、-S-、又は-O-を表し、露光感度の観点から、-O-が好ましい。
<< Preferred Aspect of Structural Unit Represented by Formula A3 >>
In formula A3, when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferable. R 31 and R 32 are each preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In Formula A3, R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
In Formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are preferably linked to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In Formula A3, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable. The arylene group may have a substituent.
In formula A3, Y represents —S— or —O—, and —O— is preferable from the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity.
 上記式A3で表される構成単位は、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。重合体A-1が式A3で表される構成単位を含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度より優れる。
 式A3中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、重合体A-1のTgをより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、重合体A-1に含まれる式A3で表される構成単位の全量に対し、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、式A3で表される構成単位中の、式A1におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit represented by the formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group. When the polymer A-1 contains the structural unit represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent and the resolution is also excellent.
In the formula A3, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be further lowered.
More specifically, the structural unit in which R 34 in formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more based on the total amount of the structural unit represented by formula A3 contained in polymer A-1.
In the structural unit represented by the formula A3, the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A1 is a hydrogen atom is usually determined from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by the method.
 式A3で表される構成単位の中でも、下記式A3-2で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の露光感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula A3, the structural unit represented by the following formula A3-2 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the exposure sensitivity during pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 
 式A3-2中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表す。 In formula A3-2, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group. To express.
 式A3-2中、R31、R32、R33、R34及びXはそれぞれ、式A3中のR31、R32、R33、R34及びXと同義であり、好ましい態様も同様である。 In the formula A3-2, respectively R 31, R 32, R 33 , R 34 and X 0 has the same meaning as R 31, R 32, R 33 , R 34 and X 0 in formula A3, preferred embodiments as well It is.
 式A3で表される構成単位の中でも、下記式A3-3で表される構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度を更に高める観点からより好ましい。 Among the structural units represented by the formula A3, the structural unit represented by the following formula A3-3 is more preferable from the viewpoint of further increasing the sensitivity during pattern formation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 
 式A3-3中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R35~R41はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表す。
 式A3-3中、R34は水素原子が好ましい。
 式A3-3中、R35~R41は、水素原子が好ましい。
In formula A3-3, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 35 to R 41 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A3-3, R 34 is preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula A3-3, R 35 to R 41 are preferably hydrogen atoms.
 式A3で表される、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位の好ましい具体例としては、下記の構成単位が例示できる。なお、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表す。 Preferable specific examples of the structural unit represented by formula A3 and having a carboxy group protected with an acid-decomposable group include the following structural units. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 
 重合体A-1に含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体A-1における構成単位Aの含有量は、重合体A-1の全質量に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが更に好ましい。
 重合体A-1における構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
 また、全ての重合体成分を構成単位(モノマー単位)に分解したうえで、構成単位Aの割合は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%~80質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The structural unit A contained in the polymer A-1 may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the polymer A-1 is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1. More preferably, it is 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer A-1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
Further, after decomposing all the polymer components into structural units (monomer units), the proportion of the structural unit A is preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component, It is more preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, and particularly preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass.
-構成単位B-
 上記重合体A-1は、酸基を有する構成単位Bを含むことが好ましい。
 構成単位Bは、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を有する構成単位である。重合体A-1が構成単位Bを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。酸基は、通常、酸基を形成しうるモノマーを用いて、酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位B)として、重合体に組み込まれる。感度向上の観点から、酸基のpKaは、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
-Structural unit B-
The polymer A-1 preferably contains a structural unit B having an acid group.
The structural unit B is a structural unit having a protective group, for example, an acid group that is not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protective group. When the polymer A-1 contains the structural unit B, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is improved, the polymer A-1 is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer in the development step after pattern exposure, and the development time can be shortened.
The acid group in this specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less. The acid group is usually incorporated into a polymer as a structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) using a monomer capable of forming an acid group. From the viewpoint of improving sensitivity, the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. The pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボン酸基及びフェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 重合体A-1への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させること又は酸無水物構造を有するモノマーを共重合させ酸無水物を加水分解することで行うことができる。
 構成単位Bである、酸基を有する構成単位は、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。具体的には、カルボキシ基を有するモノマーとしては、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、4-カルボキシスチレン等が挙げられ、フェノール性水酸基を有するモノマーとしてはp-ヒドロキシスチレン、4-ヒドロキシフェニルメタクリレート等が挙げられ、酸無水物を有するモノマーとしては、無水マレイン酸等が挙げられる。
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among these, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of a carboxylic acid group and a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
Introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A-1 is carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group or by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid anhydride structure and hydrolyzing the acid anhydride. Can do.
The structural unit having an acid group, which is the structural unit B, is derived from a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit obtained by substituting an acid group for a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, or (meth) acrylic acid. More preferred is a structural unit. Specific examples of the monomer having a carboxy group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, 4-carboxystyrene, and the like. Examples thereof include hydroxystyrene and 4-hydroxyphenyl methacrylate, and examples of the monomer having an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride.
 構成単位Bとしては、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位、又は、フェノール性水酸基を有する構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度がより良好となるという観点から好ましい。
 構成単位Bを形成しうる酸基を有するモノマーは既述の例に限定されない。
As the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation becomes better.
The monomer having an acid group that can form the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
 重合体A-1に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体A-1は、重合体A-1の全質量に対し、酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位B)を0.1質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.5質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、1質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 重合体A-1における構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit B contained in the polymer A-1 may be only one type or two or more types.
The polymer A-1 preferably contains 0.1% by mass to 20% by mass of a structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1. The content is more preferably 15% by mass, and further preferably 1% by mass to 10% by mass. When it is in the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer A-1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
<<その他の構成単位>>
 重合体A-1は、既述の構成単位A及び構成単位B以外の、他の構成単位(以下、構成単位Cと称することがある。)を、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位Cを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体A-1の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Cを適切に使用することで、重合体A-1のTgを容易に調整することができる。
 ガラス転移温度を120℃以下とすることで、重合体A-1を含有するポジ型感光性樹脂層は、転写性、仮支持体からの剥離性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。
 重合体A-1は、構成単位Cを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
<< Other structural units >>
In the polymer A-1, other structural units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the structural unit C) other than the structural unit A and the structural unit B described above are effective for the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. You may include in the range which does not impair.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a monomer which forms the structural unit C, For example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester , Bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
Various characteristics of the polymer A-1 can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the kind and content by using the structural unit C. In particular, by properly using the structural unit C, the Tg of the polymer A-1 can be easily adjusted.
By setting the glass transition temperature to 120 ° C. or less, the positive photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A-1 can maintain a good level of transferability and peelability from the temporary support while forming a pattern. Better resolution and sensitivity.
The polymer A-1 may contain only one type of structural unit C, or may contain two or more types of structural unit C.
 構成単位Cは、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 The structural unit C specifically includes styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, (meth) Methyl acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Mention may be made of structural units formed by polymerizing benzyl acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth) acrylate, or the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A No. 2004-264623 can be given.
 また、構成単位Cとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、構成単位Cとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 Further, as the structural unit C, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material. Specific examples of monomers that form these structural units include styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, And benzyl (meth) acrylate etc. are mentioned. Among them, the structural unit C is preferably a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate.
 また、構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as the monomer forming the structural unit C, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Among them, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 構成単位Cの含有量は、重合体A-1の全質量に対し、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、1質量%以上であることが好ましく、5質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。 The content of the structural unit C is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the polymer A-1. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
 重合体A-1が、構成単位Cとして、上記構成単位Bにおける酸基のエステルを有する構成単位を含むことも、現像液に対する溶解性、及び、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の物理物性を最適化する観点から好ましい。
 中でも、重合体A-1は、構成単位Bとして、カルボン酸基を有する構成単位を含み、更に、カルボン酸エステル基を含む構成単位Cを共重合成分として含むことが好ましく、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位Bと、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル又は(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル由来の構成単位(c)とを含む重合体がより好ましい。
 以下、本開示における重合体A-1の好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。
The polymer A-1 also contains a structural unit having an ester of an acid group in the structural unit B as the structural unit C. This also optimizes the solubility in the developer and the physical properties of the positive photosensitive resin layer. It is preferable from a viewpoint of making it.
Among them, the polymer A-1 preferably includes a structural unit having a carboxylic acid group as the structural unit B, and further includes a structural unit C including a carboxylic acid ester group as a copolymerization component. A polymer containing the structural unit B derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit (c) derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is more preferred.
Hereinafter, preferred examples of the polymer A-1 in the present disclosure will be given, but the present disclosure is not limited to the following examples. In addition, the ratio of the structural unit and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplary compounds are appropriately selected in order to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

 
-重合体A-1のガラス転移温度:Tg-
 本開示における重合体A-1のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、転写性の観点、及び、上述の加熱工程における加熱温度を調節する観点から、90℃以下であることが好ましく、20℃以上60℃以下であることがより好ましく30℃以上50℃以下であることが更に好ましい。
-Glass transition temperature of polymer A-1: Tg-
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A-1 in the present disclosure is preferably 90 ° C. or less, and preferably 20 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. from the viewpoint of transferability and the adjustment of the heating temperature in the heating step described above. More preferably, the temperature is not higher than 30 ° C, and more preferably not lower than 30 ° C and not higher than 50 ° C.
 重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする重合体A-1のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method for adjusting the Tg of the polymer to the above-described preferable range, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constituent unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constituent unit, the FOX formula is used as a guideline. It is possible to control the Tg of the target polymer A-1.
About the FOX formula: Tg of the homopolymer of the first structural unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, the mass fraction in the copolymer of the first structural unit is W1, and the Tg of the homopolymer of the second structural unit Is Tg2 and the mass fraction in the copolymer of the second structural unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first structural unit and the second structural unit is It is possible to estimate according to the equation.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each constituent unit contained in the copolymer using the FOX formula described above.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
-重合体A-1の酸価-
 重合体A-1の酸価は、現像性及び転写性の観点から、0mgKOH/g以上200mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、5mgKOH/g以上100mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。
-Acid value of polymer A-1-
The acid value of the polymer A-1 is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 200 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 5 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH / g or less, from the viewpoint of developability and transferability.
 本開示における重合体の酸価は、重合体1gあたりの酸性成分を中和するのに要する水酸化カリウムの質量を表したものである。具体的には、測定サンプルをテトラヒドロフラン/水=9/1混合溶媒に溶解し、電位差滴定装置(商品名:AT-510、京都電子工業(株)製)を用いて、得られた溶液を25℃において、0.1M水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で中和滴定する。滴定pH曲線の変曲点を滴定終点として、次式により酸価を算出する。
   A=56.11×Vs×0.1×f/w
 A:酸価(mgKOH/g)
 Vs:滴定に要した0.1mol/l水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の使用量(mL)
 f:0.1mol/l水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の力価
 w:測定サンプルの質量(g)(固形分換算)
The acid value of the polymer in the present disclosure represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per gram of polymer. Specifically, the measurement sample was dissolved in a tetrahydrofuran / water = 9/1 mixed solvent, and the obtained solution was treated with a potentiometric titrator (trade name: AT-510, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Industry Co., Ltd.). Neutralization titration with 0.1 M aqueous sodium hydroxide solution at ° C. The acid value is calculated by the following formula using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the titration end point.
A = 56.11 × Vs × 0.1 × f / w
A: Acid value (mgKOH / g)
Vs: Amount of 0.1 mol / l sodium hydroxide aqueous solution required for titration (mL)
f: Potency of 0.1 mol / l sodium hydroxide aqueous solution w: Mass (g) of measurement sample (solid content conversion)
-重合体A-1の分子量:Mw-
 重合体A-1の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であることが好ましい。重合体A-1の重量平均分子量が60,000以下であることで、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の溶融粘度を低く抑え、上記基板と貼り合わせる際において低温(例えば130℃以下)での貼り合わせを実現することができる。
 また、重合体A-1の重量平均分子量は、2,000~60,000であることが好ましく、3,000~50,000であることがより好ましい。
-Molecular weight of polymer A-1: Mw-
The molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 60,000 or less in terms of polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight. When the polymer A-1 has a weight average molecular weight of 60,000 or less, the melt viscosity of the positive photosensitive resin layer is suppressed to be low, and bonding at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) is performed when bonding to the substrate. Can be realized.
Further, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 50,000.
 重合体A-1の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersity) between the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A-1 is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
-重合体A-1の製造方法-
 重合体A-1の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、式Aで表される構成単位Aを形成するための重合性単量体、酸基を有する構成単位Bを形成するための重合性単量体、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位Cを形成するための重合性単量体を含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
-Production Method of Polymer A-1-
The production method (synthesis method) of the polymer A-1 is not particularly limited. For example, a polymerizable monomer for forming the structural unit A represented by the formula A, and a structural unit B having an acid group It is synthesized by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a polymerizable monomer for forming a polymer and, if necessary, a polymerizable monomer for forming other structural unit C. be able to. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示における上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全固形分に対し、上記重合体成分を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
 また、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、上記基板に対して良好な密着性を発現させる観点から、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全固形分に対し、上記重合体A-1を50質量%~99.9質量%の割合で含むことが好ましく、70質量%~98質量%の割合で含むことがより好ましい。
In the present disclosure, the positive photosensitive resin layer is 50% by mass to 99% by mass of the polymer component with respect to the total solid content of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably included in a proportion of .9% by mass, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
In addition, the positive photosensitive resin layer has a content of 50% by mass or more of the polymer A-1 with respect to the total solid content of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of developing good adhesion to the substrate. It is preferably contained in a proportion of 99.9% by mass, more preferably in a proportion of 70% by mass to 98% by mass.
〔他の重合体〕
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体成分として、重合体A-1に加え、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、式Aで示される構成単位(a)を含まない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の配合量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Other polymers]
The positive photosensitive resin layer includes, as a polymer component, the structural unit (a) represented by the formula A as long as the effects of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure are not impaired in addition to the polymer A-1. The polymer may further be included (sometimes referred to as “other polymer”). When the positive photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the blending amount of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less and more preferably 30% by mass or less in the total polymer component. Preferably, it is 20 mass% or less.
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体A-1に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
In addition to the polymer A-1, the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer or two or more types.
As other polymers, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, which are commercially available, such as SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer). , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (above, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncryl 6 Joncryl 67, Joncryl 586 (manufactured by BASF) or the like can also be used.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び、荷電粒子線等の放射線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましい。
[Photoacid generator]
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with radiation such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and charged particle beams.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that generates an acid in response to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can also be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. It can be preferably used in combination.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less. A photoacid generator that generates an acid is particularly preferable. The lower limit value of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably −10.0 or more, for example.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤と、非イオン性光酸発生剤とを挙げることができる。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、後述するオニウム塩化合物、及び、後述するオキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound described later and an oxime sulfonate compound described later from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and an oxime sulfonate compound. It is more preferable to contain.
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。これら光酸発生剤は、1種単独又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、及び、ジアゾメタン誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoints of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. These photoacid generators can be used singly or in combination of two or more. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines and diazomethane derivatives include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-212494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物、すなわち、オキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物としては、下記式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物が好ましい。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, that is, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure, a compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the following formula (B1) is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 
 式(B1)中、R21は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、*は他の原子又は他の基との結合部位を表す。 In formula (B1), R 21 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, and * represents a bonding site with another atom or another group.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、いずれの基も置換されてもよく、R21におけるアルキル基は、直鎖状であっても、分岐構造を有していても、環構造を有していてもよい。許容される置換基は以下に説明する。
 R21のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10の、直鎖状又は分岐状アルキル基が好ましい。R21のアルキル基は、炭素数6~11のアリール基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシ基、シクロアルキル基(7,7-ジメチル-2-オキソノルボルニル基などの有橋式脂環基を含む、好ましくはビシクロアルキル基等)、又は、ハロゲン原子で置換されてもよい。
 R21のアリール基としては、炭素数6~18のアリール基が好ましく、フェニル基又はナフチル基がより好ましい。R21のアリール基は、炭素数1~4のアルキル基、アルコキシ基及びハロゲン原子よりなる群から選ばれた1つ以上の基で置換されてもよい。
In the compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1), any group may be substituted, and the alkyl group in R 21 may be linear or branched. It may have a ring structure. Acceptable substituents are described below.
The alkyl group for R 21 is preferably a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group of R 21 is an aryl group having 6 to 11 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group (7,7-dimethyl-2-oxonorbornyl group or other bridged alicyclic group) , Preferably a bicycloalkyl group or the like) or a halogen atom.
As the aryl group for R 21, an aryl group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is preferable, and a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is more preferable. The aryl group of R 21 may be substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom.
 式(B1)で表されるオキシムスルホネート構造を有する化合物は、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0078~0111に記載のオキシムスルホネート化合物であることも好ましい。 The compound having an oxime sulfonate structure represented by the formula (B1) is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound described in paragraphs 0078 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-85643.
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。 Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, quaternary ammonium salts, and the like. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。 As the ionic photoacid generator, ionic photoacid generators described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度、解像度の観点から、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
A photo-acid generator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the photoacid generator in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. And more preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass.
〔溶剤〕
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。
 また、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成する感光性樹脂組成物は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を容易に形成するため、一旦溶剤を含有させて感光性樹脂組成物の粘度を調節し、溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物を塗布及び乾燥して、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。
 本開示に使用される溶剤としては、公知の溶剤を用いることができる。溶剤としては、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類、エステル類、ケトン類、アミド類、及び、ラクトン類等が例示できる。また、溶剤の具体例としては特開2011-221494号公報の段落0174~段落0178に記載の溶剤も挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
〔solvent〕
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent.
In addition, the photosensitive resin composition for forming the positive photosensitive resin layer is for easily forming the positive photosensitive resin layer. The positive photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by applying and drying a photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent.
As the solvent used in the present disclosure, a known solvent can be used. Solvents include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, ethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, propylene glycol dialkyl ethers, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers And diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol dialkyl ethers, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates, esters, ketones, amides, and lactones. Specific examples of the solvent include the solvents described in paragraphs 0174 to 0178 of JP2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、既述の溶剤に、更に必要に応じて、ベンジルエチルエーテル、ジヘキシルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、イソホロン、カプロン酸、カプリル酸、1-オクタノール、1-ノナール、ベンジルアルコール、アニソール、酢酸ベンジル、安息香酸エチル、シュウ酸ジエチル、マレイン酸ジエチル、炭酸エチレン、又は、炭酸プロピレン等の溶剤を添加することもできる。
 溶剤は、1種のみ用いてもよく、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用することがより好ましい。溶剤を2種以上使用する場合には、例えば、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類とジアルキルエーテル類との併用、ジアセテート類とジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類との併用、又は、エステル類とブチレングリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類との併用が好ましい。
In addition, benzyl ethyl ether, dihexyl ether, ethylene glycol monophenyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, isophorone, caproic acid, caprylic acid, 1-octanol, -Solvents such as nonal, benzyl alcohol, anisole, benzyl acetate, ethyl benzoate, diethyl oxalate, diethyl maleate, ethylene carbonate or propylene carbonate can also be added.
Only 1 type may be used for a solvent and 2 or more types may be used for it.
The solvent which can be used for this indication may be used individually by 1 type, and it is more preferable to use 2 types together. When two or more solvents are used, for example, combined use of propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates and dialkyl ethers, combined use of diacetates and diethylene glycol dialkyl ethers, or esters and butylene glycol alkyl ether acetates A combination with the above is preferred.
 また、溶剤としては、沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤、沸点160℃以上の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物であることが好ましい。
 沸点130℃以上160℃未満の溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点146℃)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点158℃)、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル(沸点155℃)、及び、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル(沸点131℃)が例示できる。
 沸点160℃以上の溶剤としては、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル(沸点170℃)、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル(沸点176℃)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート(沸点160℃)、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート(沸点213℃)、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート(沸点171℃)、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル(沸点189℃)、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点162℃)、プロピレングリコールジアセテート(沸点190℃)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(沸点220℃)、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル(沸点175℃)、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート(沸点232℃)が例示できる。
Further, the solvent is preferably a solvent having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C., a solvent having a boiling point of 160 ° C. or higher, or a mixture thereof.
Solvents having a boiling point of 130 ° C. or higher and lower than 160 ° C. include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (boiling point 146 ° C.), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (boiling point 158 ° C.), propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether (boiling point 155 ° C.), and An example is propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether (boiling point 131 ° C.).
Solvents having a boiling point of 160 ° C or higher include ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate (boiling point 170 ° C), diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether (boiling point 176 ° C), propylene glycol monomethyl ether propionate (boiling point 160 ° C), dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate. (Boiling point 213 ° C), 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate (boiling point 171 ° C), diethylene glycol diethyl ether (boiling point 189 ° C), diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 162 ° C), propylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 190 ° C), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (Boiling point 220 ° C), dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether (boiling point 175 ° C), and 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate (boiling point 232 ° C) There can be exemplified.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部あたり、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、2質量%以下であることが好ましく、1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
The content of the solvent in applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by weight to 1,900 parts by weight, preferably 100 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. More preferably, it is 900 parts by mass.
Further, the content of the solvent in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 2% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, it is 0.5 mass% or less.
〔その他の添加剤〕
 本開示における上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体A-1及び光酸発生剤に加え、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
[Other additives]
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain a known additive as required in addition to the polymer A-1 and the photoacid generator.
-可塑剤-
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、可塑性を改良する目的で、可塑剤を含有してもよい。
 上記可塑剤は、重合体A-1よりも重量平均分子量が小さいことが好ましい。
 可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、可塑性付与の観点から500以上10,000未満が好ましく、700以上5,000未満がより好ましく、800以上4,000未満が更に好ましい。
 可塑剤は、重合体A-1と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は下記構造を有することが好ましい。
-Plasticizer-
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain a plasticizer for the purpose of improving plasticity.
The plasticizer preferably has a weight average molecular weight smaller than that of the polymer A-1.
The weight average molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 500 or more and less than 10,000, more preferably 700 or more and less than 5,000, and still more preferably 800 or more and less than 4,000 from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the polymer A-1 and exhibits plasticity. However, from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer preferably has the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 
 上記式中、Rは炭素数2~8のアルキル基であり、nは1~50の整数を表し、*は他の原子との結合部位を表す。 In the above formula, R represents an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, n represents an integer of 1 to 50, and * represents a bonding site with another atom.
 なお、例えば、上記構造のアルキレンオキシ基を有する化合物(「化合物X」とする。)であっても、化合物X、重合体A-1及び光酸発生剤を混合して得た化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物が、化合物Xを含まずに形成した化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物に比べて可塑性が向上しない場合は、本開示における可塑剤には該当しない。例えば、任意に添加される界面活性剤は、一般に感光性樹脂組成物に可塑性をもたらす量で使用されることはないため、本明細書における可塑剤には該当しない。 For example, even a compound having an alkyleneoxy group having the above structure (hereinafter referred to as “compound X”) is a chemically amplified positive type obtained by mixing compound X, polymer A-1 and a photoacid generator. If the photosensitive resin composition does not improve the plasticity as compared to the chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition formed without the compound X, it does not fall under the plasticizer in the present disclosure. For example, the optionally added surfactant is generally not used in an amount that brings plasticity to the photosensitive resin composition, and thus does not correspond to the plasticizer in the present specification.
 上記可塑剤としては、例えば、下記構造を有する化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the plasticizer include, but are not limited to, compounds having the following structure.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 
 可塑剤の含有量は、密着性の観点から、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましい。
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、可塑剤を1種のみを含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass and preferably 2% by mass to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of adhesion. Is more preferable.
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of plasticizer or two or more types.
-増感剤-
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、増感剤を更に含むことができる。
 増感剤は、活性光線を吸収して電子励起状態となる。電子励起状態となった増感剤は、光酸発生剤と接触して、電子移動、エネルギー移動、及び、発熱などの作用が生じる。これにより光酸発生剤は化学変化を起こして分解し、酸を生成する。
 増感剤を含有させることで、露光感度を向上させることができる。
-Sensitizer-
The positive photosensitive resin layer may further contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer absorbs actinic rays and enters an electronically excited state. The sensitizer in an electronically excited state comes into contact with the photoacid generator, and effects such as electron transfer, energy transfer, and heat generation occur. Thereby, a photo-acid generator raise | generates a chemical change and decomposes | disassembles and produces | generates an acid.
Exposure sensitivity can be improved by containing a sensitizer.
 増感剤としては、アントラセン誘導体、アクリドン誘導体、チオキサントン誘導体、クマリン誘導体、ベーススチリル誘導体、及び、ジスチリルベンゼン誘導体よりなる群からえらばれた化合物が好ましく、アントラセン誘導体がより好ましい。
 アントラセン誘導体としては、アントラセン、9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン、9,10-ジクロロアントラセン、2-エチル-9,10-ジメトキシアントラセン、9-ヒドロキシメチルアントラセン、9-ブロモアントラセン、9-クロロアントラセン、9,10-ジブロモアントラセン、2-エチルアントラセン、又は、9,10-ジメトキシアントラセンが好ましい。
As the sensitizer, a compound selected from the group consisting of an anthracene derivative, an acridone derivative, a thioxanthone derivative, a coumarin derivative, a base styryl derivative, and a distyrylbenzene derivative is preferable, and an anthracene derivative is more preferable.
Anthracene derivatives include anthracene, 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene, 9,10-dichloroanthracene, 2-ethyl-9,10-dimethoxyanthracene, 9-hydroxymethylanthracene, 9-bromoanthracene, 9-chloroanthracene, 9 1,10-dibromoanthracene, 2-ethylanthracene or 9,10-dimethoxyanthracene is preferred.
 上記増感剤としては、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0139~段落0141に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 Examples of the sensitizer include compounds described in paragraphs 0139 to 0141 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 増感剤の含有量は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the sensitizer is preferably 0% by mass to 10% by mass and more preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. .
-塩基性化合物-
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を更に含むことが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-Basic compounds-
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
The basic compound can be arbitrarily selected from basic compounds used in chemically amplified resists. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-212494, paragraphs 0204 to 0207, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及び、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及び、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシドとしては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、テトラ-n-ヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシドなどが挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及び、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエートなどが挙げられる。
Specific examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, and the like. Examples include ethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, and dicyclohexylmethylamine.
Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, and diphenylamine.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinamide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7-Undecene.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium hydroxide include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetra-n-butylammonium hydroxide, and tetra-n-hexylammonium hydroxide.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
 上記塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The said basic compound may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferred.
-ヘテロ環状化合物-
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層は、ヘテロ環状化合物を含むことができる。
 本開示におけるヘテロ環状化合物には、特に制限はない。例えば、以下に述べる分子内にエポキシ基又はオキセタニル基を有する化合物、アルコキシメチル基含有ヘテロ環状化合物、その他、各種環状エーテル、環状エステル(ラクトン)などの含酸素モノマー、環状アミン、オキサゾリンといった含窒素モノマー、更には珪素、硫黄、リン等を有するヘテロ環モノマー等を添加することができる。
-Heterocyclic compounds-
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can include a heterocyclic compound.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the heterocyclic compound in this indication. For example, compounds having an epoxy group or oxetanyl group in the molecule described below, alkoxymethyl group-containing heterocyclic compounds, other oxygen-containing monomers such as various cyclic ethers and cyclic esters (lactones), nitrogen-containing monomers such as cyclic amines and oxazolines Furthermore, a heterocyclic monomer having silicon, sulfur, phosphorus or the like can be added.
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層中におけるヘテロ環状化合物の添加量は、ヘテロ環状化合物を添加する場合には、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、密着性及びエッチング耐性の観点で好ましい。ヘテロ環状化合物は1種のみを用いてもよく、2種以上を併用することもできる。 The addition amount of the heterocyclic compound in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 0.01% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer when the heterocyclic compound is added. It is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 1% by mass to 5% by mass. It is preferable in the said range from a viewpoint of adhesiveness and etching tolerance. Only 1 type may be used for a heterocyclic compound and it can also use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の具体例としては、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂等を挙げることができる。 Specific examples of the compound having an epoxy group in the molecule include bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, cresol novolac type epoxy resin, aliphatic epoxy resin and the like.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は市販品として入手できる。例えば、JER828、JER1007、JER157S70(三菱ケミカル(株)製)、JER157S65((株)三菱ケミカルホールディングス製)など、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0189に記載の市販品などが挙げられる。
 その他の市販品として、ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S、同EP-4003S、同EP-4010S、同EP-4011S(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、NC-2000、NC-3000、NC-7300、XD-1000、EPPN-501、EPPN-502(以上、(株)ADEKA製)、デナコールEX-611、EX-612、EX-614、EX-614B、EX-622、EX-512、EX-521、EX-411、EX-421、EX-313、EX-314、EX-321、EX-211、EX-212、EX-810、EX-811、EX-850、EX-851、EX-821、EX-830、EX-832、EX-841、EX-911、EX-941、EX-920、EX-931、EX-212L、EX-214L、EX-216L、EX-321L、EX-850L、DLC-201、DLC-203、DLC-204、DLC-205、DLC-206、DLC-301、DLC-402、EX-111,EX-121、EX-141、EX-145、EX-146、EX-147、EX-171、EX-192(以上ナガセケムテック製)、YH-300、YH-301、YH-302、YH-315、YH-324、YH-325(以上、新日鐵住金化学(株)製)セロキサイド2021P、2081、2000、3000、EHPE3150、エポリードGT400、セルビナースB0134、B0177((株)ダイセル製)などが挙げられる。
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物は1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
A compound having an epoxy group in the molecule can be obtained as a commercial product. For example, JER828, JER1007, JER157S70 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Co., Ltd.), JER157S65 (manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Holdings Co., Ltd.), and the like, such as commercial products described in paragraph 0189 of JP2011-221494A can be mentioned.
Other commercially available products include ADEKA RESIN EP-4000S, EP-4003S, EP-4010S, EP-4011S (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), NC-2000, NC-3000, NC-7300, XD- 1000, EPPN-501, EPPN-502 (above, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), Denacol EX-611, EX-612, EX-614, EX-614B, EX-622, EX-512, EX-521, EX- 411, EX-421, EX-313, EX-314, EX-321, EX-211, EX-212, EX-810, EX-811, EX-850, EX-851, EX-821, EX-830, EX-832, EX-841, EX-911, EX-941, EX-920, EX-931, EX-212 EX-214L, EX-216L, EX-321L, EX-850L, DLC-201, DLC-203, DLC-204, DLC-205, DLC-206, DLC-301, DLC-402, EX-111, EX -121, EX-141, EX-145, EX-146, EX-147, EX-171, EX-192 (manufactured by Nagase Chemtech), YH-300, YH-301, YH-302, YH-315, YH-324, YH-325 (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd.) Celoxide 2021P, 2081, 2000, 3000, EHPE3150, Epolide GT400, Cellbiners B0134, B0177 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), and the like.
The compound which has an epoxy group in a molecule | numerator may be used individually by 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together.
 分子内にエポキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂及び脂肪族エポキシ樹脂がより好ましく挙げられ、脂肪族エポキシ樹脂が特に好ましく挙げられる。 Among the compounds having an epoxy group in the molecule, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin and aliphatic epoxy resin are more preferable, and aliphatic epoxy resin is particularly preferable.
 分子内にオキセタニル基を有する化合物の具体例としては、アロンオキセタンOXT-201、OXT-211、OXT-212、OXT-213、OXT-121、OXT-221、OX-SQ、PNOX(以上、東亞合成(株)製)を用いることができる。 Specific examples of compounds having an oxetanyl group in the molecule include Aron Oxetane OXT-201, OXT-211, OXT-212, OXT-213, OXT-121, OXT-221, OX-SQ, PNOX (and above, Toagosei) Can be used.
 また、オキセタニル基を含む化合物は、単独で又はエポキシ基を含む化合物と混合して使用することが好ましい。 In addition, the compound containing an oxetanyl group is preferably used alone or mixed with a compound containing an epoxy group.
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層においては、ヘテロ環状化合物がエポキシ基を有する化合物であることが、エッチング耐性及び線幅安定性の観点から好ましい。 In the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure, the heterocyclic compound is preferably a compound having an epoxy group from the viewpoint of etching resistance and line width stability.
-アルコキシシラン化合物-
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、アルコキシシラン化合物を含有してもよい。アルコキシシラン化合物としては、トリアルコキシシラン化合物が好ましく挙げられる。
 アルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアコキシシラン、γ-グリシドキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メタクリロキシプロピルアルキルジアルコキシシラン、γ-クロロプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、γ-メルカプトプロピルトリアルコキシシラン、β-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリアルコキシシラン、ビニルトリアルコキシシランが挙げられる。これらのうち、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランやγ-メタクリロキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランがより好ましく、γ-グリシドキシプロピルトリアルコキシシランが更に好ましく、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシランが特に好ましい。これらは1種単独又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用することができる。
-Alkoxysilane compounds-
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain an alkoxysilane compound. Preferred examples of the alkoxysilane compound include trialkoxysilane compounds.
Examples of the alkoxysilane compound include γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltriacoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, and γ-methacryloxy. Propyltrialkoxysilane, γ-methacryloxypropylalkyldialkoxysilane, γ-chloropropyltrialkoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrialkoxysilane, β- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrialkoxysilane, vinyltrialkoxysilane Is mentioned. Of these, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane and γ-methacryloxypropyltrialkoxysilane are more preferable, γ-glycidoxypropyltrialkoxysilane is more preferable, and 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane is particularly preferable. preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
-界面活性剤-
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、膜厚均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(登録商標)(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(登録商標)(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
 また、界面活性剤として、下記式I-1で表される構成単位A及び構成単位Bを含み、テトラヒドロフラン(THF)を溶剤とした場合のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーで測定されるポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)が1,000以上10,000以下である共重合体を好ましい例として挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of film thickness uniformity. As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic), or amphoteric can be used, but a preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. . In addition, under the following trade names, KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-Top (manufactured by JEMCO), MegaFac (registered trademark) (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Fluorard (manufactured by Sumitomo 3M), Asahi Guard, Surflon (registered trademark) (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.), etc. List each series.
Further, as a surfactant, it contains a structural unit A and a structural unit B represented by the following formula I-1, and is a weight average in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography using tetrahydrofuran (THF) as a solvent. A preferable example is a copolymer having a molecular weight (Mw) of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

 
 式(I-1)中、R401及びR403はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、R402は炭素数1以上4以下の直鎖アルキレン基を表し、R404は水素原子又は炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、Lは炭素数3以上6以下のアルキレン基を表し、p及びqは重合比を表す質量百分率であり、pは10質量%以上80質量%以下の数値を表し、qは20質量%以上90質量%以下の数値を表し、rは1以上18以下の整数を表し、sは1以上10以下の整数を表し、*は他の構造との結合部位を表す。 In formula (I-1), R 401 and R 403 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 402 represents a linear alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 404 represents a hydrogen atom or a carbon group. Represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, L represents an alkylene group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, p and q are mass percentages representing a polymerization ratio, and p is a numerical value of 10 mass% to 80 mass%. Q represents a numerical value of 20% to 90% by mass, r represents an integer of 1 to 18, s represents an integer of 1 to 10, and * represents a bonding site with another structure. To express.
 Lは、下記式(I-2)で表される分岐アルキレン基であることが好ましい。式(I-2)におけるR405は、炭素数1以上4以下のアルキル基を表し、相溶性と被塗布面に対する濡れ性の点で、炭素数1以上3以下のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキル基がより好ましい。pとqとの和(p+q)は、p+q=100、すなわち、100質量%であることが好ましい。 L is preferably a branched alkylene group represented by the following formula (I-2). R 405 in formula (I-2) represents an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in terms of compatibility and wettability to the coated surface. Two or three alkyl groups are more preferred. The sum (p + q) of p and q is preferably p + q = 100, that is, 100% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

 
 共重合体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上5,000以下がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the copolymer is more preferably from 1,500 to 5,000.
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。 In addition, surfactants described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of JP-A-2009-237362 can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 界面活性剤の添加量は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
Surfactant may be used individually by 1 type and may use 2 or more types together.
The addition amount of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, the content is 01% by mass to 3% by mass.
-その他の成分-
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層には、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 その他の成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-Other ingredients-
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure includes metal oxide particles, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid multiplier, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, a thermal radical polymerization initiator, a thermal acid generator, Known additives such as ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, crosslinking agents, and organic or inorganic suspending agents can be further added.
Preferred embodiments of the other components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in this specification.
〔ポジ型感光性樹脂層の形成方法〕
 各成分、及び、溶剤を任意の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解してポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成するための感光性樹脂組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径0.2μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
 上記感光性樹脂組成物を用いたポジ型感光性樹脂層の形成方法の詳細については、後述する本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法において説明する。
[Method for forming positive photosensitive resin layer]
A photosensitive resin composition for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer can be prepared by mixing each component and a solvent in an arbitrary ratio and by an arbitrary method, and stirring and dissolving. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by preparing each solution of each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm or the like.
Details of the method for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer using the photosensitive resin composition will be described in the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure described later.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層以外の層(以下、「その他の層」と称することがある)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、カバーフィルム、上記中間層と上記第二の中間層の間に含まれる他の中間層、公知の紫外線吸収剤を含む層、熱可塑性樹脂層、密着層等を挙げることができる。
 上記他の中間層としては、上記中間層又は上記第二の中間層と同様の層が挙げられる。
<Other layers>
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than the positive photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter also referred to as “other layer”). Other layers include contrast enhancement layers, cover films, other intermediate layers included between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, layers containing known UV absorbers, thermoplastic resin layers, adhesive layers, etc. Can be mentioned.
Examples of the other intermediate layer include the same layers as the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer.
-カバーフィルム-
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、カバーフィルムを有してもよい。
 カバーフィルムとしては、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましく、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
-Cover film-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film.
Examples of the cover film include a resin film and paper. A resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Among these, a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 カバーフィルムの厚さは特に限定されず、例えば、1μm~2mmのものが好ましく挙げられる。 The thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and for example, a thickness of 1 μm to 2 mm is preferable.
-熱可塑性樹脂層、カバーフィルム等-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、転写性の観点から、上記仮支持体と上記中間層との間に、熱可塑性樹脂層を更に有することが好ましい。
 上記熱可塑性樹脂層は、仮支持体の剥離時に、中間層と熱可塑性樹脂層との間で剥離することが好ましい。すなわち、熱可塑性樹脂層は、仮支持体と共に剥離されることが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を保護する目的でカバーフィルムを有していてもよい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 中でも、転写性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層が、アクリル樹脂及びスチレン/アクリル共重合体よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の熱可塑性樹脂を含むことが好ましい。
-Thermoplastic resin layer, cover film, etc.-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably further includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the temporary support and the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of transferability.
The thermoplastic resin layer is preferably peeled between the intermediate layer and the thermoplastic resin layer when the temporary support is peeled off. That is, it is preferable that the thermoplastic resin layer is peeled off together with the temporary support.
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a cover film for the purpose of protecting the positive photosensitive resin layer.
Preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer are described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP 2014-85643 A, and preferred embodiments of the other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP 2014-85643 A, respectively. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
Especially, it is preferable that a thermoplastic resin layer contains the at least 1 sort (s) of thermoplastic resin chosen from the group which consists of an acrylic resin and a styrene / acryl copolymer from a transferable viewpoint.
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料が、熱可塑性樹脂層等のその他の層を有する場合、特開2006-259138号公報の段落0094~段落0098に記載の感光性転写材料の作製方法に準じて作製することができる。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層を有する本開示に係る感光性転写材料を作製する場合には、仮支持体上に、熱可塑性の有機高分子と添加剤とを溶解した溶解液(熱可塑性樹脂層用塗布液)を塗布し、乾燥させて熱可塑性樹脂層を設けた後、得られた熱可塑性樹脂層上に熱可塑性樹脂層を溶解しない溶剤に樹脂及び添加剤を加えて調製した調製液(中間層組成物)を塗布し、乾燥させて中間層を積層する。形成した中間層上に、更に、中間層を溶解しない溶剤を用いて調製した感光性樹脂組成物を塗布し、乾燥させてポジ型感光性樹脂層を積層することによって、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を好適に作製することができる。
When the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure has other layers such as a thermoplastic resin layer, the photosensitive transfer material is manufactured according to the method for manufacturing a photosensitive transfer material described in paragraphs 0094 to 0098 of JP-A-2006-259138. can do.
For example, when preparing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure having a thermoplastic resin layer, a solution (for thermoplastic resin layer) in which a thermoplastic organic polymer and an additive are dissolved on a temporary support. A coating solution prepared by adding a resin and an additive to a solvent that does not dissolve the thermoplastic resin layer on the obtained thermoplastic resin layer after applying a coating liquid) and drying to provide a thermoplastic resin layer (intermediate) The layer composition) is applied and dried to laminate the intermediate layer. On the formed intermediate layer, a photosensitive resin composition prepared using a solvent that does not dissolve the intermediate layer is further applied, and dried to laminate a positive photosensitive resin layer, whereby the photosensitive property according to the present disclosure is obtained. A transfer material can be suitably produced.
-コントラストエンハンスメント層-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層に加え、コントラストエンハンスメント層を有することができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層は、中間層とポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に有することが好ましい。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層(Contrast Enhancement Layer;CEL)は、露光前には露光波長に対する吸収が大きいが、露光されるに伴って次第に吸収が小さくなる、すなわち、光の透過率が高くなる材料(光消色性色素成分と称する)を含有する層である。光消色性色素成分としては、ジアゾニウム塩、スチルバゾリウム塩、アリールニトロソ塩類等が知られている。被膜形成成分としては、フェノール系樹脂等が用いられる。
 その他、コントラストエンハンスメント層としては、特開平6-97065号公報の段落0004~段落0051、特開平6-332167号公報の段落0012~段落0055、フォトポリマーハンドブック,フォトポリマー懇話会編,工業調査会(1989)、フォトポリマー・テクノロジー,山岡、永松編,(株)日刊工業新聞社(1988)に記載の材料を用いることができる。
-Contrast enhancement layer-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can have a contrast enhancement layer in addition to the positive photosensitive resin layer.
It is preferable to have a contrast enhancement layer between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
A contrast enhancement layer (CEL) is a material that absorbs light with respect to an exposure wavelength before exposure, but gradually decreases with exposure, that is, a material that increases light transmittance (photodecoloration). It is a layer containing a coloring pigment component). Known photodecolorable dye components include diazonium salts, stilbazolium salts, arylnitroso salts, and the like. A phenolic resin or the like is used as the film forming component.
In addition, as contrast enhancement layers, paragraphs 0004 to 0051 of JP-A-6-97065, paragraphs 0012 to 0055 of JP-A-6-332167, photopolymer handbook, photopolymer social gathering, industrial research group ( 1989), photopolymer technology, Yamaoka, Nagamatsu edition, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun Co., Ltd. (1988) can be used.
-紫外線吸収剤を含む層-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、紫外線吸収剤を含む層(紫外線吸収層)を有してもよい。
 紫外線吸収層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の、中間層とは反対の側に含まれることが好ましい。例えば、カバーフィルムとポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に紫外線吸収層を有する態様が挙げられる。
 このような紫外線吸収層を有する感光性転写材料を基材に転写した場合、基材とポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に紫外線吸収層が存在することとなる。
 このような態様によれば、基材による露光光の反射が低減され、上述の反射波と入射波との干渉により生じた定在波による露光の影響が低減されると考えられる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、特に制限なく公知の紫外線吸収剤が使用可能であり、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、シアノアクリレート系、ニッケルキレート系、ヒンダードアミン系等の化合物、これらの構造を含むポリマー、又は、金属酸化物等の無機紫外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。
-Layer containing UV absorber-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer containing an ultraviolet absorber (ultraviolet absorbing layer).
The ultraviolet absorbing layer is preferably included on the opposite side of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the intermediate layer. For example, the aspect which has a ultraviolet absorption layer between a cover film and a positive photosensitive resin layer is mentioned.
When a photosensitive transfer material having such an ultraviolet absorbing layer is transferred to a substrate, an ultraviolet absorbing layer is present between the substrate and the positive photosensitive resin layer.
According to such an aspect, it is considered that the reflection of the exposure light by the base material is reduced, and the influence of the exposure by the standing wave generated by the interference between the reflected wave and the incident wave is reduced.
As the ultraviolet absorber, known ultraviolet absorbers can be used without particular limitation, and compounds such as salicylates, benzophenones, benzotriazoles, cyanoacrylates, nickel chelates, hindered amines, etc., and polymers containing these structures Or inorganic ultraviolet absorbers such as metal oxides.
-密着層-
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料は、更にその他の層をカバーフィルムとポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に密着層を有していてもよい。
 密着層を有することにより、基材等に転写した場合の密着性が良好となる。
-Adhesion layer-
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure may further have an adhesion layer between the cover film and the positive photosensitive resin layer as another layer.
By having the adhesion layer, the adhesion when transferred to a substrate or the like is improved.
(感光性転写材料の製造方法)
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法の第一の態様は、
 仮支持体上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
 上記中間層形成用組成物に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程を含む。
 また、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の製造方法の第二の態様は、
 カバーフィルム上に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程、
 上記感光性樹脂組成物上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
 上記中間層形成用組成物上に仮支持体を貼り付ける工程を含む。
 上記第一の態様及び上記第二の態様のいずれの方法によっても、本開示に係る感光性転写材料が得られる。
(Method for producing photosensitive transfer material)
The first aspect of the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes:
Applying a composition for forming an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and
A step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition.
In addition, the second aspect of the method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure includes:
Applying a photosensitive resin composition on the cover film;
Applying an intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition; and
A step of attaching a temporary support to the intermediate layer forming composition.
The photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure can be obtained by any of the methods of the first aspect and the second aspect.
<第一の態様>
〔中間層塗布工程〕
 第一の態様における仮支持体上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程(中間層塗布工程)は、仮支持体上に上述の中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて中間層形成用組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、中間層塗布工程においては、仮支持体と接するように中間層形成用組成物を塗布することが好ましい。
<First aspect>
[Intermediate layer coating process]
The step of applying the intermediate layer forming composition on the temporary support in the first embodiment (intermediate layer applying step) is a step of applying the above-described intermediate layer forming composition on the temporary support.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, or ink jet coating.
After the application, the intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In the intermediate layer application step, the intermediate layer forming composition is preferably applied so as to be in contact with the temporary support.
〔ポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程〕
 第一の態様における上記中間層形成用組成物に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程(ポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程)は、上記塗布された中間層形成用組成物上に上述の感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の中間層形成用塗布液の塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて感光性樹脂組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、ポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程においては、中間層形成用組成物上に第二の中間層形成用組成物がある場合には、第二の中間層形成用組成物と接するように感光性樹脂組成物を塗布することが好ましい。
[Positive photosensitive resin layer coating process]
In the first aspect, the step of applying the photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition (positive photosensitive resin layer applying step) includes the above-described photosensitive property on the applied intermediate layer forming composition. It is a step of applying a resin composition.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution.
After the application, the photosensitive resin composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In addition, in the positive photosensitive resin layer coating step, when the second intermediate layer forming composition is present on the intermediate layer forming composition, the photosensitive resin layer is contacted with the second intermediate layer forming composition. It is preferable to apply a functional resin composition.
〔第二の中間層塗布工程〕
 上記第一の態様は、第二の中間層形成用組成物を、中間層形成組成物上に塗布する工程(第二の中間層塗布工程)を更に含んでもよい。第二の中間層塗布工程は、上記塗布された中間層形成用組成物上に上述の第二の中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の中間層形成用塗布液の塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて第二の中間層形成用組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、第二の中間層塗布工程においては、上記中間層形成用組成物と接するように第二の中間層形成用組成物を塗布してもよいし、中間層形成用組成物上に他の層を形成するための組成物が塗布されている場合には、他の層を形成するための組成物と接するように第二の中間層形成用組成物を塗布してもよい。
[Second intermediate layer coating step]
The first aspect may further include a step of applying the second intermediate layer forming composition onto the intermediate layer forming composition (second intermediate layer applying step). A 2nd intermediate | middle layer application | coating process is a process of apply | coating the above-mentioned 2nd intermediate | middle layer formation composition on the apply | coated said intermediate | middle layer formation composition.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution.
After the application, the second intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In the second intermediate layer coating step, the second intermediate layer forming composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the intermediate layer forming composition, or other intermediate layer forming composition may be applied to the intermediate layer forming composition. When the composition for forming a layer is applied, the second intermediate layer forming composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the composition for forming another layer.
〔他の層塗布工程〕
 上記第一の態様は、他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を塗布する工程(他の層塗布工程)を更に含んでもよい。
 他の層としては、上記中間層と第二の中間層の間に形成される他の中間層、又は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層上に形成される公知の紫外線吸収剤を含む層等の層が挙げられる。
 他の層の形成に用いられる組成物は、例えば、上記中間層形成用組成物上に、上記第二の中間層形成用組成物の塗布前に塗布される。また、上記感光性樹脂組成物上に他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を塗布してもよい。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の中間層形成用塗布液の塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
[Other layer coating process]
Said 1st aspect may further include the process (other layer application | coating process) of apply | coating the composition used for formation of another layer.
Other layers include other intermediate layers formed between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, or layers including a known ultraviolet absorber formed on the positive photosensitive resin layer. Is mentioned.
The composition used for forming the other layer is applied onto the intermediate layer forming composition before the application of the second intermediate layer forming composition, for example. Moreover, you may apply | coat the composition used for formation of another layer on the said photosensitive resin composition.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the above-described coating method of the intermediate layer forming coating solution.
You may dry the composition used for formation of another layer as needed after the said application | coating. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
〔カバーフィルムを貼り付ける工程〕
 上記第一の態様は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層にカバーフィルムを貼り付ける工程を更に含んでもよい。
 カバーフィルムの貼り付け方法としては、公知の方法が用いられればよく、例えば、公知のラミネート方法等が用いられる。
[Process of attaching cover film]
The first aspect may further include a step of attaching a cover film to the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side.
As a method for attaching the cover film, a known method may be used. For example, a known laminating method or the like is used.
<第二の態様>
〔ポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程〕
 第二の態様における、カバーフィルム上に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程(感光性樹脂層塗布工程)は、カバーフィルム上に上述の感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の第一の態様におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程における塗布方法と同様の方法により塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて感光性樹脂組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、ポジ型感光性樹脂層塗布工程においては、カバーフィルムと接するように感光性樹脂組成物を塗布してもよいし、カバーフィルム上に他の層の形成に用いられる組成物が塗布されている場合には、上記他の層の形成に用いられる組成物上に塗布してもよい。
<Second aspect>
[Positive photosensitive resin layer coating process]
In the second aspect, the step of applying the photosensitive resin composition on the cover film (photosensitive resin layer application step) is a step of applying the above-described photosensitive resin composition on the cover film.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the positive photosensitive resin layer coating step in the first aspect described above.
After the application, the photosensitive resin composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In the positive photosensitive resin layer application step, the photosensitive resin composition may be applied so as to be in contact with the cover film, or a composition used for forming another layer is applied on the cover film. If present, it may be applied on the composition used for forming the other layer.
〔中間層塗布工程〕
 第二の態様における上記感光性樹脂組成物上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程(中間層塗布工程)は、上記塗布された感光性樹脂組成物上に上述の中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の第一の態様の中間層塗布工程における塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて中間層形成用組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、中間層塗布工程においては、感光性樹脂組成物上に第二の中間層形成用組成物がある場合には、第二の中間層形成用組成物上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布すればよい。
〔第二の中間層塗布工程〕
 上記第二の態様は、第二の中間層形成用組成物を、感光性樹脂組成物上に塗布する工程(第二の中間層塗布工程)を更に含んでもよい。第二の中間層塗布工程は、上記塗布された感光性樹脂組成物上に上述の第二の中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程である。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の第一の態様の第二の中間層塗布工程における塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて第二の中間層形成用組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
 また、第二の中間層塗布工程においては、上記感光性樹脂組成物と接するように第二の中間層形成用組成物を塗布することが好ましい。
[Intermediate layer coating process]
In the second aspect, the step of applying the intermediate layer forming composition onto the photosensitive resin composition (intermediate layer applying step) includes the above-mentioned intermediate layer forming composition on the applied photosensitive resin composition. It is the process of apply | coating.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the intermediate layer coating step of the first aspect described above.
After the application, the intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In the intermediate layer coating step, if there is a second intermediate layer forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition, the intermediate layer forming composition is applied on the second intermediate layer forming composition. do it.
[Second intermediate layer coating step]
The second aspect may further include a step of applying the second intermediate layer forming composition onto the photosensitive resin composition (second intermediate layer applying step). A 2nd intermediate | middle layer application | coating process is a process of apply | coating the above-mentioned 2nd composition for intermediate | middle layer formation on the apply | coated photosensitive resin composition.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the second intermediate layer coating step of the first aspect described above.
After the application, the second intermediate layer forming composition may be dried as necessary. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
In the second intermediate layer coating step, it is preferable to apply the second intermediate layer forming composition so as to be in contact with the photosensitive resin composition.
〔他の層塗布工程〕
 上記第二の態様は、他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を塗布する工程(他の層塗布工程)を更に含んでもよい。
 他の層としては、上記中間層と第二の中間層の間に形成される他の中間層、又は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層上に形成される公知の紫外線吸収剤を含む層等が挙げられる。
 他の層の形成に用いられる組成物は、例えば、上記第二の中間層形成用組成物上に、上記中間層形成用組成物の塗布前に塗布される。また、上記カバーフィルム上に、上記感光性樹脂組成物の塗布前に他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を塗布してもよい。
 塗布方法は、特に限定されず、上述の第一の態様の他の層塗布工程における塗布方法と同様の方法で塗布することができる。
 上記塗布の後、必要に応じて他の層の形成に用いられる組成物を乾燥してもよい。乾燥方法としては、特に限定されず、風又は温風による乾燥、加熱による乾燥等が挙げられる。
[Other layer coating process]
Said 2nd aspect may further include the process (other layer application | coating process) of apply | coating the composition used for formation of another layer.
Examples of the other layers include other intermediate layers formed between the intermediate layer and the second intermediate layer, or a layer containing a known ultraviolet absorber formed on the positive photosensitive resin layer. It is done.
The composition used for forming the other layer is applied onto the second intermediate layer forming composition before the application of the intermediate layer forming composition, for example. Moreover, you may apply | coat the composition used for formation of another layer on the said cover film before application | coating of the said photosensitive resin composition.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by the same method as the coating method in the other layer coating process of the first aspect described above.
You may dry the composition used for formation of another layer as needed after the said application | coating. It does not specifically limit as a drying method, Drying by a wind or warm air, drying by heating, etc. are mentioned.
〔仮支持体を貼り付ける工程〕
 上記第二の態様は、中間層形成用組成物上に仮支持体を貼り付ける工程を含む。
 仮支持体は、中間層形成用組成物と接するように貼り付けられることが好ましい。
 仮支持体の貼り付け方法としては、公知の方法が用いられればよく、例えば、公知のラミネート方法等が用いられる。
[Step of pasting temporary support]
Said 2nd aspect includes the process of sticking a temporary support body on the composition for intermediate | middle layer formation.
The temporary support is preferably attached so as to be in contact with the intermediate layer forming composition.
As a method for attaching the temporary support, a known method may be used. For example, a known laminating method or the like is used.
 感光性転写材料は第一、第二の態様のいずれによっても製造することができる。中間層(又は、第二の中間層)とポジ型感光性樹脂層の密着性を向上させたい場合には、中間層(又は、第二の中間層)が粒子を含み、かつ、第一の態様とすることが好ましい。また、中間層と仮支持体の剥離性を向上させたい場合は中間層に粒子を含み、かつ第二の態様とすることが好ましい。 The photosensitive transfer material can be produced by either the first or second embodiment. When it is desired to improve the adhesion between the intermediate layer (or the second intermediate layer) and the positive photosensitive resin layer, the intermediate layer (or the second intermediate layer) contains particles, and the first layer It is preferable to set it as an aspect. Moreover, when it is desired to improve the peelability between the intermediate layer and the temporary support, it is preferable to include particles in the intermediate layer and set the second aspect.
(レジストパターンの製造方法、及び、回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法は、特に制限はないが、
 基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
 仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 上記露光する工程後の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と
、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた回路配線の製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、
 基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
 仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、
 上記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域における上記基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 なお、本開示における感光性転写材料における「ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層」とは、仮支持体、中間層、及び、ポジ型感光性樹脂層をこの順で有している本開示に係る感光性転写材料における、仮支持体側の最外層ではなく、ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を意味している。また、「ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層」とは、感光性転写材料がカバーフィルムを有する場合には、カバーフィルムの剥離後のポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層である。
 また、上記支持体を「基材」ともいい、また、上記表面に導電性層を有する支持体を「基板」ともいう。
(Resist pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method)
The method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited,
A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
It is preferable to include the step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a resist pattern in this order.
Further, the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a circuit wiring manufacturing method using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure,
A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
A step of pattern exposure of the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
Developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern;
It is preferable that the process of etching the said board | substrate in the area | region where the said resist pattern is not arrange | positioned is included in this order.
In the present disclosure, the “outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side” in the photosensitive transfer material is the present disclosure having a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order. In the photosensitive transfer material according to the present invention, it means not the outermost layer on the temporary support side but the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side. In addition, the “outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side” is the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side after the cover film is peeled off when the photosensitive transfer material has a cover film.
The support is also referred to as a “base material”, and the support having a conductive layer on the surface is also referred to as a “substrate”.
 従来、感光性樹脂層は感光システムの違いから、活性光線を照射した部分が像として残るネガ型と、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型とに分けられる。ポジ型では活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤などを用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。そのため、いわゆるリワーク性に優れる観点からは、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を用いることが好ましい。また、残存したポジ型感光性樹脂層を再度露光して異なるパターンを作製する、という技術はポジ型のポジ型感光性樹脂層でなければ実現できないため、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を用いる本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法においては、露光を2回以上行う態様も好ましく挙げられる。 Conventionally, photosensitive resin layers are classified into a negative type in which a portion irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image and a positive type in which a portion not irradiated with actinic rays is left as an image due to differences in photosensitive systems. In the positive type, by irradiating actinic rays, for example, to improve the solubility of the exposed portion using a photosensitive agent that generates acid upon irradiation with actinic rays, both the exposed and unexposed portions are exposed at the time of pattern exposure. If the pattern shape obtained is not cured and the substrate is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like. Therefore, it is preferable to use a positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of excellent so-called reworkability. In addition, since the technique of re-exposing the remaining positive photosensitive resin layer to produce a different pattern can be realized only by the positive positive photosensitive resin layer, the present disclosure uses the positive photosensitive resin layer. In the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present invention or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, an embodiment in which exposure is performed twice or more is also preferable.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基板に対し、本開示に係る感光性転写材料の上記仮支持体を上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を上記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る感光性転写材料が上記カバーフィルムを有する場合、貼り合わせ工程においては、カバーフィルムを剥離した後に貼り合わせが行われる。
 剥離方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。例えば、仮支持体の一部を指又はピンセット等の器具を用いて把持して剥離する方法が挙げられる。
 上記貼り合わせ工程においては、上記基板と、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層とが接触するように、基板と、必要に応じてカバーフィルムが剥離された感光性転写材料と、を圧着することが好ましい。上記態様によれば、露光及び現像後のパターン形成されたポジ型感光性樹脂層を、導電性層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に用いることができる。
 基板とカバーフィルムが剥離された感光性転写材料とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を用いることができる。
 具体的には、上記感光性転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層と導電性層が接するように基板と上記感光性転写材料とを重ね、ロール等による加圧、又は、加圧及び加熱することに行う方法が好ましく挙げられる。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネータ等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 上記貼り合わせ工程における圧着圧力及び温度は、特に制限はなく、貼り合せる支持体の表面の材質、例えば、導電性層及びポジ型感光性樹脂層の材質、搬送速度、並びに、使用する圧着機等に応じ、適宜設定することができる。また、感光性転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層上にカバーフィルムを有する場合は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層からカバーフィルムを除去した後、圧着すればよい。
 上記基材が樹脂フィルムである場合、ロールツーロールでの圧着を行ってもよい。
<Lamination process>
The method of manufacturing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of attaching the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure to the positive photosensitive resin layer side with respect to a substrate. It is preferable to include a step of bonding the outermost layer in contact with the substrate (bonding step).
When the photosensitive transfer material which concerns on this indication has the said cover film, in the bonding process, bonding is performed after peeling a cover film.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a peeling method, What is necessary is just to peel by a well-known method. For example, there is a method in which a part of the temporary support is grasped and peeled using a tool such as a finger or tweezers.
In the bonding step, the substrate and the photosensitive transfer material from which the cover film has been peeled off as necessary are pressure-bonded so that the substrate and the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side are in contact with each other. It is preferable to do. According to the said aspect, the positive type photosensitive resin layer by which the pattern formation after exposure and image development can be used suitably as an etching resist at the time of etching a conductive layer.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular as a method of crimping | bonding the board | substrate and the photosensitive transfer material from which the cover film was peeled, A well-known transfer method and a lamination method can be used.
Specifically, the substrate and the photosensitive transfer material are overlapped so that the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material and the conductive layer are in contact with each other, and pressure is applied by a roll or the like. And the method performed to heating is mentioned preferably. For laminating, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator that can further increase the productivity can be used.
There are no particular limitations on the pressure and temperature of the bonding in the bonding step, and the surface material of the support to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer, the conveyance speed, and the pressure bonding machine used, etc. Can be set as appropriate. Further, in the case where the cover film is provided on the positive photosensitive resin layer of the photosensitive transfer material, the cover film may be removed from the positive photosensitive resin layer and then bonded.
When the base material is a resin film, a roll-to-roll pressure bonding may be performed.
〔支持体(基材)〕
 支持体上に導電性層が積層された基板は、支持体がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用配線である場合、支持体がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、支持体は透明であることが好ましい。
 支持体の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 支持体は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、上述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みが少ない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
[Support (base material)]
As for the board | substrate with which the electroconductive layer was laminated | stacked on the support body, it is preferable that a support body is a glass base material or a film base material, and it is more preferable that it is a film base material. When the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is a touch panel wiring, the support is particularly preferably a sheet-shaped resin composition.
The support is preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The support may be composed of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and tempered glass represented by Corning's gorilla glass can be used. In addition, as the above-described transparent substrate, materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A, and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
When a film substrate is used as the substrate, it is more preferable to use a substrate with low optical distortion and a substrate with high transparency. Specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, and cycloolefin polymer.
〔導電性層〕
 支持体上に形成されている導電性層としては、一般的な配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電性層を挙げることができる。
 導電性層は支持体上に複数形成されていることも好ましい。
 導電性層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
[Conductive layer]
Examples of the conductive layer formed on the support include any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring.
It is also preferable that a plurality of conductive layers are formed on the support.
Examples of the material for the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, and Mo.
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、複数の導電性層のうち少なくとも一つの導電性層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電性層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the method for manufacturing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers includes a metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor for a visual recognition part used in a capacitive touch panel or a wiring for a peripheral extraction part.
〔基板〕
 本開示に用いられる基板(配線形成用基板)は、基材の表面に導電性層を有する基板であることが好ましい。導電性層をパターンニングすることで配線を形成する。本例では、PETなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物、金属などの複数の導電性層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
〔substrate〕
The substrate (wiring forming substrate) used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of the base material. A wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. In this example, a film substrate such as PET is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
<仮支持体剥離工程>
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程(仮支持体剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記仮支持体剥離工程における仮支持体を剥離する方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。
<Temporary support peeling process>
The resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material (temporary support peeling step).
There is no restriction | limiting in particular in the method of peeling the temporary support body in the said temporary support body peeling process, What is necessary is just to peel by a well-known method.
<露光工程>
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 露光工程において、露光マスクは中間層に接触する。
 露光マスクと中間層とを接触させて露光を行うことにより、ポジ型感光性樹脂層とマスクとの距離が小さくなるためパターンの解像度が向上する等の利点がある。
 上記露光工程では、中間層及びポジ型感光性樹脂層が少なくとも形成された基材に対し、パターンを有するマスクを介して、活性光線を照射することが好ましい。
 例えば、本工程において、ポジ型感光性樹脂層に含まれる光酸発生剤が分解し酸が発生し、発生した酸の触媒作用により、塗膜成分中に含まれる酸分解性基が加水分解されて、酸基、例えば、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が生成する。
 本開示において、マスクにおけるパターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは、特に限定されない。本開示において製造される回路基板を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えば、タッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は、100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることがより好ましい。
<Exposure process>
In the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the positive photosensitive resin layer is formed by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been removed. It is preferable to include a pattern exposure step (exposure step).
In the exposure process, the exposure mask contacts the intermediate layer.
By performing exposure with the exposure mask and the intermediate layer in contact with each other, there is an advantage that the distance between the positive photosensitive resin layer and the mask is reduced, so that the resolution of the pattern is improved.
In the exposure step, it is preferable to irradiate the base material on which at least the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer are formed with actinic rays through a mask having a pattern.
For example, in this step, the photoacid generator contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer is decomposed to generate an acid, and the acid-decomposable group contained in the coating film component is hydrolyzed by the catalytic action of the generated acid. Thus, an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is formed.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern in the mask are not particularly limited. Since it is desired to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) including an input device having a circuit board manufactured in the present disclosure and to minimize the area occupied by the extraction wiring, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the touch panel) The electrode pattern and the part of the lead-out wiring) are preferably fine wires of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
 活性光線としては、可視光、紫外光、及び、電子線が挙げられるが、可視光又は紫外光が好ましく、紫外線が特に好ましい。
 活性光線による露光光源としては、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、発光ダイオード(LED)光源、エキシマレーザー発生装置などを用いることができ、g線(436nm)、i線(365nm)、h線(405nm)などの波長300nm以上450nm以下の波長を有する活性光線が好ましく使用できる。また、必要に応じて長波長カットフィルター、短波長カットフィルター、バンドパスフィルターのような分光フィルターを通して照射光を調整することもできる。
 露光装置としては、ミラープロジェクションアライナー、ステッパー、スキャナー、プロキシミティ、コンタクト、マイクロレンズアレイ、レーザー露光など各種方式の露光機を用いることができる。
 露光量は、使用するポジ型感光性樹脂層に応じ、適宜選択すればよいが、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時にポジ型感光性樹脂層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
Visible light, ultraviolet light, and an electron beam are mentioned as actinic light, However, Visible light or ultraviolet light is preferable and an ultraviolet-ray is especially preferable.
As an exposure light source using actinic light, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultrahigh-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light-emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used, g-line (436 nm), i-line (365 nm) Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm to 450 nm, such as h-line (405 nm), can be preferably used. Moreover, irradiation light can also be adjusted through spectral filters, such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a band pass filter, as needed.
As the exposure apparatus, various types of exposure machines such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, and a laser exposure can be used.
Exposure dose, depending on the positive photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 200mJ / cm 2, it is 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 100mJ / cm 2 More preferred.
It is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce pattern edge roughness due to standing waves generated in the positive photosensitive resin layer during exposure.
<現像工程>
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)含むことが好ましい。
 現像工程により、ポジ型感光性樹脂層における露光部が除去される。
 上記現像工程における露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の除去される部分が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液が好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液がより好ましい。現像液は、更に、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
<Development process>
The resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern (developing step).
The exposed part in the positive photosensitive resin layer is removed by the development process.
Development of the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer in the development step can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as the positive photosensitive resin layer can be developed. For example, a known developer such as a developer described in JP-A No. 5-72724 can be used. The developer is preferably a developer in which the portion where the positive photosensitive resin layer is removed exhibits a dissolution type development behavior. The developer is preferably an alkaline aqueous solution, and more preferably, for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having a pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant, and the like. Examples of the developer suitably used in the present disclosure include the developer described in Paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/092731.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後のポジ型感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。
 また、露光後すぐ現像してもよいが、露光から現像までの時間が、露光から、0.5時間~数時間程度経過していてもよい。
 また、本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、現像後、水等により洗浄する工程、得られたレジストパターンを有する支持体を乾燥する工程等、公知の工程を含んでいてもよい。
The development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development, and the like may be used. Here, the shower development will be described. The exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developer onto the positive photosensitive resin layer after exposure. Further, after the development, it is preferable to remove the development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C. to 40 ° C.
Although development may be performed immediately after exposure, the time from exposure to development may be about 0.5 to several hours after exposure.
Further, the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure, or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of washing with water after development, a step of drying a support having the obtained resist pattern, and the like. A known process may be included.
 更に、現像して得られたレジストパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa以上の環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、121.6kPa以下の環境下で行うことが好ましく、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分間~30分間であることが好ましく、2分間~10分間であることがより好ましく、2分間~4分間であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Furthermore, you may have the post-baking process which heat-processes the resist pattern obtained by image development.
The post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa or more, and more preferably in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is preferably performed in an environment of 121.6 kPa or less, more preferably in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and particularly preferably in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
The post-bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法における各工程時における上記支持体の搬送速度は、特に制限はないが、露光時を除いて、0.5m/min~10m/minであることが好ましく、露光時を除いて、2.0m/min~8.0m/minであることがより好ましい。 The transport speed of the support in each step in the method for producing a resist pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, but is 0.5 m / It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
<エッチング工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域における上記基板をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層から形成された上記パターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電性層のエッチング処理を行う。
 上記導電性層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸、又は、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、又は、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、又は、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
<Etching process>
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the substrate in a region where the resist pattern is not disposed.
In the etching step, the conductive layer is etched using the pattern formed from the positive photosensitive resin layer in the developing step as an etching resist.
Etching of the conductive layer can be performed by a known method such as a method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A or a dry etching method such as a known plasma etching. .
For example, as an etching method, a commonly performed wet etching method in which the substrate is immersed in an etching solution can be used. As an etchant used for wet etching, an acid type or alkaline type etchant may be appropriately selected in accordance with an object to be etched.
Acidic etchants include hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, aqueous solutions of acidic components such as phosphoric acid, acidic components and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as potassium acid. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
Alkali type etching solutions include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, organic amines, or aqueous solutions of alkali components such as organic amine salts such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, alkaline components and potassium permanganate. A mixed aqueous solution of a salt such as As the alkali component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkali components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示において、エッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用されるパターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に上記パターンが剥離することが防止され、上記パターンの存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. In the present disclosure, the pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling off during the etching process, and a portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
 上記エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチングされた上記導電性層を有する支持体を洗浄する工程(洗浄工程)、及び、エッチングされた上記導電性層を有する支持体を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温(10℃~35℃)で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄することが挙げられる。乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(好ましくは0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching process, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a process of cleaning the support having the etched conductive layer (cleaning process) and a support having the etched conductive layer as necessary. You may perform the process (drying process) of drying a body. As the cleaning step, for example, the substrate may be cleaned with pure water for 10 seconds to 300 seconds at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.). As for the drying step, for example, air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (preferably about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted for drying.
<エッチングレジスト剥離工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記エッチング工程の後に、上記レジストパターンを剥離液を用いて剥離する工程(エッチングレジスト剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程の終了後、パターン形成された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が残存している。上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が不要であれば、残存する全ての上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を除去すればよい。
 剥離液を用いて剥離する方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液に上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層(レジストパターン)などを有する基材を5分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム若しくは水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第三級アミン若しくは第四級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、又は、これらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、又は、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。
<Etching resist stripping process>
It is preferable that the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication includes the process (etching resist peeling process) which peels the said resist pattern using peeling liquid after the said etching process.
After the etching step is completed, the patterned positive photosensitive resin layer remains. If the positive photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining positive photosensitive resin layers may be removed.
As a method of stripping using the stripping solution, for example, the positive photosensitive resin layer (resist pattern) is preferably added to the stripping solution being stirred at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. Examples thereof include a method of immersing the base material having 5 to 30 minutes.
As the stripping solution, for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or And a stripping solution dissolved in a mixed solution thereof. A stripping solution may be used and stripped by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、必要に応じ、露光工程、現像工程及びエッチング工程を2回以上繰り返してもよい。
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を、本開示においても好適に用いることができる。
Moreover, the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication may repeat an exposure process, a image development process, and an etching process twice or more as needed.
As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be suitably used in the present disclosure.
 本開示に係るレジストパターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The resist pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include other optional steps. For example, although the following processes are mentioned, it is not limited to these processes.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、導電性層の表面、例えば、支持体上に有する導電性層の一部又は全ての表面の可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step of reducing visible light reflectance>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, a part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the support. Is possible.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing copper.
Regarding preferred embodiments of the processing for reducing the visible light reflectance, paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP2014-150118A, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP2013-206315A are described. The contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
<エッチングされた上記導電性層を有する支持体上に絶縁膜を形成する工程、及び、絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記導電性層を有する支持体上、例えば、形成した配線(エッチングされた上記導電性層)上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を形成する工程とを含むことも好ましい。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電性層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電性層を形成してもよい。
<The process of forming an insulating film on the support body which has the said conductive layer etched, and the process of forming a new conductive layer on an insulating film>
A method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on a support having the conductive layer, for example, a formed wiring (the etched conductive layer), and a new method on the insulating film. Including a step of forming a conductive layer.
There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the process of forming an insulating film, The method of forming a well-known permanent film can be mentioned. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having insulating properties.
There is no particular limitation on the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記新たな導電性層を、上記と同様な方法によりエッチングレジストを形成してエッチングしてもよいし、別途、公知の方法によりエッチングしてもよい。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により得られる配線基板は、上記基板上に1層のみの配線を有していても、2層以上の配線を有していてもよい。
Further, in the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by a method similar to the above, or may be separately etched by a known method. Good.
The wiring board obtained by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may have only one layer of wiring on the substrate, or may have two or more layers of wiring.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、支持体が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電性層を有し、支持体の両方の表面に形成された導電性層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、支持体の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン(第一の配線)、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターン(第二の配線)を形成した配線、好ましくはタッチパネル用配線を形成することができる。 Further, in the method of manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the support has a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and the circuit is sequentially or simultaneously applied to the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the support. It is also preferable to form. With such a configuration, the first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the support, and the second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably for a touch panel Wiring can be formed.
(配線及び配線基板)
 本開示に係る配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された配線である。また、上記配線としては、回路配線が好ましく挙げられる。
 本開示に係る配線基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る配線基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用配線基板であることが好ましい。
(Wiring and wiring board)
The wiring according to the present disclosure is a wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure. Moreover, as said wiring, a circuit wiring is mentioned preferably.
The wiring board according to the present disclosure is a substrate having wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
Although the use of the wiring board which concerns on this indication is not limited, For example, it is preferable that it is a wiring board for touchscreens.
(入力装置及び表示装置)
 本開示に係る入力装置は、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いて作製した回路配線を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた回路配線の作製方法としては、上述の本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法が挙げられる。
 また、本開示に係る入力装置は、静電容量型入力装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る入力装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた入力装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る入力装置の製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る表示装置は、本開示に係る入力装置を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
(Input device and display device)
The input device according to the present disclosure preferably includes a circuit wiring manufactured using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. Examples of a method for producing a circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include the above-described method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
In addition, the input device according to the present disclosure is preferably a capacitive input device.
The input device according to the present disclosure is preferably an input device including a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
The method for manufacturing an input device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
The display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure. The display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an organic EL display device and an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネル、及び、タッチパネル表示装置)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いて作製した回路配線を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る感光性転写材料を用いた回路配線の作製方法としては、上述の本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法が挙げられる。
 また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルであることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネル表示装置であり、本開示に係るタッチパネルを備えるタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置の製造方法は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法を含むことが好ましく、本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法を含むことがより好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置のおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
(Touch panel and touch panel display device)
The touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes a circuit wiring manufactured using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure. Examples of a method for producing a circuit wiring using the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure include the above-described method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
Moreover, it is preferable that the touchscreen which concerns on this indication is a touchscreen which has at least the wiring manufactured by the manufacturing method of the circuit wiring which concerns on this indication.
The touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably includes at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The touch panel display device according to the present disclosure is a touch panel display device having at least wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel display device including the touch panel according to the present disclosure.
The touch panel display device manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, and more preferably includes the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure.
As a detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, any of known methods such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method may be used. Among these, the electrostatic capacity method is preferable.
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1又は図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。 As the touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-T-2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, JP 2013-168125 A). 19 of the gazette, one described in FIG. 1 or FIG. 5 of JP 2012-89102 A, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP No. 2013-54727 shown in FIG. 2), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164671A), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
 本開示に係るタッチパネル及び本開示に係るタッチパネル表示装置としては、“最新タッチパネル技術”(2009年7月6日、(株)テクノタイムズ社発行)、三谷雄二監修、“タッチパネルの技術と開発”(2004年12月、シーエムシー出版)、FPD International 2009 Forum T-11講演テキストブック、Cypress Semiconductor Corporation アプリケーションノートAN2292等に開示されている構成を適用することができる。 As the touch panel according to the present disclosure and the touch panel display device according to the present disclosure, “latest touch panel technology” (issued July 6, 2009, published by Techno Times Co., Ltd.), supervised by Yuji Mitani, “touch panel technology and development” ( The configurations disclosed in FPD International 2009 Forum T-11 lecture textbook, Cypress Semiconductor Corporation application note AN2292, etc. can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the embodiment of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, “part” and “%” are based on mass.
(実施例1)
<感光性樹脂組成物1の作製>
 以下の組成で各成分を混合し、感光性樹脂組成物1を作製した。
Example 1
<Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 1>
Each component was mixed with the following composition and the photosensitive resin composition 1 was produced.
〔感光性樹脂組成物1の組成〕
・特定重合体1(下記化合物、重量平均分子量15,000):9.66質量部
(特定重合体1のTgを既述の方法にて測定したところ、40℃であった。)
・光酸発生剤(下記化合物B):0.25質量部
・界面活性剤(下記化合物C):0.01質量部
・添加剤(下記化合物D):0.08質量部
・プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート〔溶剤〕:90.00質量部
[Composition of photosensitive resin composition 1]
Specific polymer 1 (the following compound, weight average molecular weight 15,000): 9.66 parts by mass (Tg of specific polymer 1 was 40 ° C. when measured by the method described above)
Photoacid generator (compound B below): 0.25 parts by mass Surfactant (compound C below): 0.01 parts by mass Additive (compound D below): 0.08 parts by mass Propylene glycol monomethyl ether Acetate [solvent]: 90.00 parts by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000014

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000014

 
 上記構造において、各構成単位の数値は、各構成単位の含有量(質量%)を表す。
 また、特定重合体1は、特開2018-031847号公報の段落0155~段落0156の記載を参照して合成した。
In the above structure, the numerical value of each structural unit represents the content (% by mass) of each structural unit.
The specific polymer 1 was synthesized with reference to the descriptions in paragraphs 0155 to 0156 of JP-A-2018-031847.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 
<中間層形成用組成物1の作製>
 以下の組成で各成分を混合し、中間層形成用組成物1を作製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 1>
Each component was mixed with the following composition, and the composition 1 for intermediate | middle layer formation was produced.
〔中間層形成用組成物1の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:62.7質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(信越化学工業(株)製、メトローズ60SH-03):3.5質量部
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of intermediate layer forming composition 1]
-Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Metrolose 60SH-03): 3.5 parts by mass-Surfactant (DIC Corporation) Manufactured by Mega-Fac (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 仮支持体である厚さ50μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(以下「PET(A)」と称する)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて中間層形成用組成物1を、乾燥膜厚が2.0μmとなる量で塗布した。上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、スリット状ノズルを用いて感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。90℃温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写材料を作製した。
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
On the polyethylene terephthalate film (hereinafter referred to as “PET (A)”) having a thickness of 50 μm, which is a temporary support, the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer using a slit-like nozzle has a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm. Was applied in an amount. After the intermediate layer forming composition 1 was dried, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm using a slit nozzle. The film was dried at 90 ° C. with warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressed as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
<引っ掻き試験>
 長さ10cm×幅5cm×厚み0.7mmのガラスの上に、感光性転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度90℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)3.6m/minの条件で転写し、仮支持体を剥離してサンプルを準備した。
 引っ掻き試験装置としては表面性試験機(新東科学(株)製、Type:14DR)を用いた。引っ掻き傷を付ける圧子は球状圧子(ダイヤモンド、先端径0.075mm)を用いた。上記で作製したガラス基板を感光性転写材料面を上にしてセットし、荷重5 g、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、引っ掻き距離50mmの条件で実施した。測定環境は室温(23℃)の大気中とした。引っ掻き傷形状観察には走査型白色干渉顕微鏡(Zygo社製NewView5020)を使用した。NewView5020のデータ解析ソフト(MetroPro)を利用し、Microモード、Z方向スキャン長さを±20μm、それ以外は初期設定の条件で、引っ掻き傷の深さを測定した。5回の測定における測定結果の算術平均値を引っ掻き深さと定義した。測定結果は表1に記載した。
<Scratch test>
The cover film is peeled from the photosensitive transfer material on a glass of length 10 cm × width 5 cm × thickness 0.7 mm, laminating roll temperature 90 ° C., linear pressure 0.6 MPa, linear velocity (laminate velocity) 3.6 m / The sample was transferred under the condition of min, and the temporary support was peeled off to prepare a sample.
A surface property tester (manufactured by Shinto Kagaku Co., Ltd., Type: 14DR) was used as a scratch test device. As an indenter for scratching, a spherical indenter (diamond, tip diameter 0.075 mm) was used. The above-prepared glass substrate was set with the photosensitive transfer material surface facing upward, and the test was carried out under the conditions of a load of 5 g, a scratching speed of 1 mm / s, and a scratching distance of 50 mm. The measurement environment was room temperature (23 ° C.) air. A scanning white interference microscope (New View 5020 manufactured by Zygo) was used for the scratch shape observation. Using NewView 5020 data analysis software (MetroPro), the scratch depth was measured under the Micro mode, the Z-direction scan length of ± 20 μm, and the other default conditions. The arithmetic average value of the measurement results in five measurements was defined as the scratch depth. The measurement results are shown in Table 1.
<基板の作製>
 厚さ200μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に厚さ250nmでスパッタリング法にて銅層を作製したロール状基板(銅基板)を使用した。
<Production of substrate>
A roll-shaped substrate (copper substrate) in which a copper layer was produced by sputtering at a thickness of 250 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 200 μm was used.
<感光性転写材料の評価:マスク汚染の評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)3.6m/minのラミネート条件で上記銅基板にラミネートし、得られたサンプルを10cm角にカットしてサンプル片とした。サンプル片から仮支持体を中間層との境界面から剥離し、アルカリ洗浄したガラス板(コーニング社製、EagleXG)を乗せ、手で軽く押し付けた後、ガラス越しに100mJ/cmの露光量で高圧水銀灯による露光を行った。露光後、ガラス板上に3kgのウェイトを載せ、10分後にガラスをゆっくり剥がし、ガラスへの感光性転写材料に含まれる成分の付着の有無を確認し、コンタクト露光時のマスク汚染性の指標とした。
 ガラスへの付着があった場合には、表1中の「マスク汚染」の欄に「有り」と、なかった場合は「無し」と記載した。
<Evaluation of photosensitive transfer material: Evaluation of mask contamination>
The cover film was peeled off from the produced photosensitive transfer material and laminated on the copper substrate under the laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating velocity) of 3.6 m / min. The sample was cut into a 10 cm square to obtain a sample piece. The temporary support is peeled off from the interface with the intermediate layer from the sample piece, placed on an alkali-cleaned glass plate (Corning Corp., EagleXG), lightly pressed by hand, and then exposed to 100 mJ / cm 2 through the glass. Exposure with a high-pressure mercury lamp was performed. After the exposure, a 3 kg weight is placed on the glass plate, and after 10 minutes, the glass is slowly peeled off, the presence or absence of adhesion of the components contained in the photosensitive transfer material to the glass is confirmed, and an index of mask contamination at the time of contact exposure did.
When there was adhesion to the glass, “Yes” was entered in the “Mask contamination” column in Table 1, and “No” was indicated when there was no adhesion.
<感光性転写材料の評価:引き置き安定性の評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)1.0m/minのラミネート条件で上記銅基板にラミネートし、得られたサンプルを10cm角にカットしてサンプル片とした。サンプル片から仮支持体を中間層との境界面から剥離し、ライン/スペース=8μm/8μmのパターンを持つフォトマスクを中間層にコンタクトさせ、100mJ/cmの露光量で高圧水銀灯による露光を行った。露光後、3時間サンプルを引き置きし、1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用いて20秒、ディップ現像を行った。
 別に、露光後24時間引き置きした以外は同様に作製したサンプルを準備した。得られた引き置き時間の異なるサンプルそれぞれの線幅を基板面内5点測定し、その平均値をライン幅データとした。これを用い、(3時間引き置きしたサンプルのライン幅/24時間引き置きしたサンプルのライン幅)を引き置き安定性の指標値とした。上記指標値が1に近いほど、露光後の引き置き時間が変化した場合であっても線幅のばらつきが小さく、工程適性が高いといえる。指標値は、0.80~1.20であることが好ましく、0.90~1.10であることが更に好ましい。
 一般的に、感光性樹脂層がポジ型である場合には、引き置きにより溶解性が向上するためラインが細くなり、上記指標値は1より大きくなる。また、感光性樹脂層がネガ型である場合には引き置きにより感光性樹脂層の溶解性が低下するため上記指標値は1より小さくなる。
 評価基準は下記の通りとし、評価結果は表1に記載した。
<Evaluation of photosensitive transfer material: Evaluation of holding stability>
The cover film was peeled from the produced photosensitive transfer material, and the laminate was obtained by laminating on the copper substrate under laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating velocity) of 1.0 m / min. The sample was cut into a 10 cm square to obtain a sample piece. The temporary support is peeled off from the boundary surface with the intermediate layer from the sample piece, a photomask having a pattern of line / space = 8 μm / 8 μm is brought into contact with the intermediate layer, and exposed with a high-pressure mercury lamp at an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2. went. After the exposure, the sample was left for 3 hours, and dip development was performed for 20 seconds using a 1.0% aqueous sodium carbonate solution.
Separately, a sample prepared in the same manner except that it was left for 24 hours after exposure was prepared. The obtained line widths of the samples with different holding times were measured at five points within the substrate surface, and the average value was used as line width data. Using this, (the line width of the sample left for 3 hours / the line width of the sample left for 24 hours) was used as an index value for the holding stability. It can be said that the closer the index value is to 1, the smaller the variation in line width and the higher the process suitability even when the holding time after exposure changes. The index value is preferably 0.80 to 1.20, and more preferably 0.90 to 1.10.
In general, when the photosensitive resin layer is a positive type, the solubility is improved by stretching, so that the line becomes thin and the index value is larger than 1. Further, when the photosensitive resin layer is a negative type, the index value becomes smaller than 1 because the solubility of the photosensitive resin layer is lowered by the holding.
The evaluation criteria are as follows, and the evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
〔評価基準〕
 A:0.90以上1.10以下である。
 B:0.80以上0.90未満又は1.10を超え1.20以下である。
 C:0.80未満又は1.20を超える。
〔Evaluation criteria〕
A: 0.90 or more and 1.10 or less.
B: 0.80 or more and less than 0.90 or more than 1.10 and 1.20 or less.
C: Less than 0.80 or more than 1.20.
<密着性の評価>
 作製した感光性転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)1.0m/minのラミネート条件で上記銅基板にラミネートした。
 次に、仮支持体を剥離して、中間層の表面にテープ(NITTO製PRINTACK)を貼りつけた後に、銅基板/感光層/中間層の積層体を、4.0cm×10cmにカットしてサンプルを作製した。
上記サンプルの銅基板側を資料台の上に固定した。
 引張圧縮試験機((株)今田製作所製、SV-55)を用いて、180度の方向に、5.5mm/秒でテープを引っ張って、中間層と感光層との間で剥離して、密着力を測定した。
 測定された密着力(N/cm)を密着性の指標とし、下記評価基準に従って評価した。密着力が大きいほど密着性がよいといえる。評価結果は表1に記載した。
<Evaluation of adhesion>
The cover film was peeled off from the produced photosensitive transfer material, and laminated on the copper substrate under the lamination conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminate velocity) of 1.0 m / min.
Next, after peeling off the temporary support and attaching a tape (PRINTACK made by NITTO) to the surface of the intermediate layer, the laminate of the copper substrate / photosensitive layer / intermediate layer was cut into 4.0 cm × 10 cm. A sample was made.
The copper substrate side of the sample was fixed on a data base.
Using a tensile / compression tester (manufactured by Imada Manufacturing Co., Ltd., SV-55), the tape was pulled at a rate of 5.5 mm / second in the direction of 180 degrees, and the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer were peeled off. The adhesion was measured.
The measured adhesion (N / cm) was used as an index of adhesion, and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. It can be said that the greater the adhesion, the better the adhesion. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
〔評価基準〕
 A:密着力が0.098N/cmを超える。
 B:密着力が0.020N/cm~0.098N/cmである。
 C:密着力が0.020N/cm未満である。
〔Evaluation criteria〕
A: Adhesive strength exceeds 0.098 N / cm.
B: Adhesion strength is 0.020 N / cm to 0.098 N / cm.
C: Adhesion force is less than 0.020 N / cm.
(実施例2)
 実施例1において、中間層形成用組成物1の替わりに、下記中間層形成用組成物2を用いた以外は、実施例1と同様に感光性転写材料を作製し、評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
(Example 2)
In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 2 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
<中間層形成用組成物2の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物2は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 2>
The intermediate layer forming composition 2 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物2の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:62.7質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(信越化学工業(株)製 メトローズ60SH-15):3.5質量部
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of intermediate layer forming composition 2]
・ Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass ・ Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass ・ Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Metrose 60SH-15): 3.5 parts by mass ・ Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation) MegaFuck (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
(実施例3)
 PET(A)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物1を乾燥膜厚1.0μmとなる量で塗布した。上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、その上に上記中間層形成用組成物1を、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物1との合計乾燥膜厚が2.0μmとなる量で塗布した。
 上記2度目の中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、その上に上記感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。
 その後、100℃温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写材料を作製した。得られた感光性転写材料について、実施例1と同様にして評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
Example 3
On the PET (A), the composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 was applied in an amount to give a dry film thickness of 1.0 μm using a slit nozzle. After the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is dried, the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is dried on the intermediate layer forming composition 1 using a slit nozzle, and the total dry film thickness is 2.0 μm. Was applied in an amount.
After the second intermediate layer forming composition 1 was dried, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in such an amount that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm.
Thereafter, the film was dried with 100 ° C. warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressure bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material. The obtained photosensitive transfer material was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
(実施例4)
<中間層形成用組成物3の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物3は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。中間層形成用組成物3は、第二の中間層形成用組成物である。
Example 4
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 3>
The intermediate layer forming composition 3 was prepared in the same manner as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition. The intermediate layer forming composition 3 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物3の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:61.2質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(日本曹達(株)製 HPC-SSL):5.0質量部
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 3]
-Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 61.2 parts by mass-Hydroxypropylcellulose (HPC-SSL manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 5.0 parts by mass-Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation (Registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 表1の組成物、膜厚となるように塗布する組成物、量を変更した以外は実施例3と同様に感光性転写材料を形成した。
実施例1と同様にして評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
Evaluation was performed in the same manner as in Example 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
(実施例5)
<中間層形成用組成物4の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物4は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。中間層形成用組成物4は、第二の中間層形成用組成物である。
(Example 5)
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 4>
The intermediate layer forming composition 4 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition. The intermediate layer forming composition 4 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物4の組成〕
・純水:32.3質量部
・メタノール:56.7質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(日本曹達(株)製 HPC-SSL):4.1質量部
・スノーテックス(登録商標)ST-O(シリカ粒子の水分散物、粒子径10~15nm、日産化学工業(株)製):6.8質量部(固形分20質量部)
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 表1に記載の組成物、膜厚となるように塗布する組成物、量を変更した以外は実施例3と同様に感光性転写材料を形成した。
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 4]
-Pure water: 32.3 parts by mass-Methanol: 56.7 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC-SSL manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts by mass-Snowtex (registered trademark) ST-O (silica) Aqueous dispersion of particles, particle size 10-15 nm, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 6.8 parts by mass (solid content 20 parts by mass)
Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation, MegaFac (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 part by mass <Preparation of photosensitive transfer material>
A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition to be applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
(実施例6)
 表の組成物、膜厚となるように塗布する組成物、量を変更した以外は実施例3と同様に感光性転写材料を形成した。
(Example 6)
The photosensitive transfer material was formed like Example 3 except having changed the composition of a table | surface, the composition apply | coated so that it might become a film thickness, and quantity.
(実施例7)
<中間層形成用組成物7の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物7は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。中間層形成用組成物7は、中間層形成用組成物である。
(Example 7)
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 7>
The intermediate layer forming composition 7 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition. The intermediate layer forming composition 7 is an intermediate layer forming composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物7の組成〕
・純水:32.3質量部
・メタノール:56.7質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(信越化学工業(株)製 メトローズ60SH-03):4.1質量部
・スノーテックス(登録商標)ST-O(シリカ粒子の水分散物、粒子径10~15nm、日産化学工業(株)製):6.8質量部(固形分20質量部)
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 7]
-Pure water: 32.3 parts by mass-Methanol: 56.7 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (Metroze 60SH-03 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts by mass-Snowtex (registered trademark) ST-O (Aqueous dispersion of silica particles, particle diameter 10-15 nm, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 6.8 parts by mass (solid content 20 parts by mass)
Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation, MegaFac (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 表1に記載の組成物、膜厚となるように塗布する組成物、量を変更した以外は実施例1と同様に感光性転写材料を形成した。
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
(実施例8)
<中間層形成用組成物8の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物8は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。中間層形成用組成物8は、第二の中間層形成用組成物である。
(Example 8)
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 8>
The intermediate layer forming composition 8 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition. The intermediate layer forming composition 8 is a second intermediate layer forming composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物8の組成〕
・純水:32.3質量部
・メタノール:56.7質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース(信越化学工業(株)製 メトローズ60SH-03):4.1質量部
・スノーテックス(登録商標)ZL シリカ粒子、粒子径70~100nm、日産化学工業(株)製):6.8質量部(固形分40質量部)
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製 メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 8]
-Pure water: 32.3 parts by mass-Methanol: 56.7 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (Metroze 60SH-03, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.): 4.1 parts by mass-Snowtex (registered trademark) ZL silica particles , Particle diameter 70-100 nm, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.): 6.8 parts by mass (solid content 40 parts by mass)
Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation, MegaFac (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 表1に記載の組成物、膜厚となるように塗布する組成物、量を変更した以外は実施例3と同様に感光性転写材料を形成した。
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 3 except that the composition shown in Table 1, the composition to be applied so as to have a film thickness, and the amount were changed.
(実施例9)
 カバーフィルムである厚さ16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムの上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて、感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。90℃温風にて乾燥させた。第二の中間層として中間層形成用組成物4を、乾燥膜厚が1.0μmとなる量で感光性樹脂組成物層上に塗布、乾燥させた。第二の中間層上に、中間層形成用組成物1を、乾燥膜厚が1.0μmとなる量で塗布、乾燥させた。最後に仮支持体として、PET(A)を圧着した。
Example 9
The photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied onto a polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 μm, which is a cover film, using a slit-like nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm. It dried with 90 degreeC warm air. As the second intermediate layer, the intermediate layer forming composition 4 was applied and dried on the photosensitive resin composition layer in such an amount that the dry film thickness was 1.0 μm. On the 2nd intermediate | middle layer, the composition 1 for intermediate | middle layer formation was apply | coated and dried in the quantity from which a dry film thickness will be 1.0 micrometer. Finally, PET (A) was pressure-bonded as a temporary support.
(実施例10)
 感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が5.0μmとなる量で塗布したこと以外は実施例1と同様にして感光性転写材料を形成した。
(Example 10)
A photosensitive transfer material was formed in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 5.0 μm.
(比較例1)
<感光性樹脂組成物2の作製>
 以下の組成で各成分を混合し、感光性樹脂組成物2を作製した。
(Comparative Example 1)
<Preparation of photosensitive resin composition 2>
Each component was mixed with the following composition and the photosensitive resin composition 2 was produced.
〔感光性樹脂組成物2の組成〕
・メタクリル酸メチル/メタクリル酸/アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル/メタクリル酸ベンジル共重合体(モル比=55/28/12/5,重量平均分子量=80,000の35質量%溶液、溶媒はメチルエチルケトン/1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール=2/1):100.0質量部
・ドデカプロピレングリコールジアクリレート:15.0質量部
・テトラエチレングリコールジメタクリレート:3.5質量部
・p-トルエンスルホンアミド:1.2質量部
・4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン:0.12質量部
・ベンゾフェノン:2.3質量部
・2-(2’-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール2量体(25質量%ジクロロメタン溶液):4.5質量部
・トリブロモメチルフェニルスルホン:0.25質量部
・ロイコクリスタルバイオレット:0.25質量部
・マラカイトグリーン:0.02質量部
[Composition of photosensitive resin composition 2]
-Methyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid / 2-ethylhexyl acrylate / benzyl methacrylate copolymer (molar ratio = 55/28/12/5, weight average molecular weight = 80,000 35% by mass solution, solvent is methyl ethyl ketone / 1 -Methoxy-2-propanol = 2/1): 100.0 parts by mass, dodecapropylene glycol diacrylate: 15.0 parts by mass, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate: 3.5 parts by mass, p-toluenesulfonamide: 1. 2 parts by mass, 4,4′-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone: 0.12 parts by mass, benzophenone: 2.3 parts by mass, 2- (2′-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer (25 parts by mass) % Dichloromethane solution): 4.5 parts by mass Tribromomethylphenylsulfone: 0.25 mass Leuco crystal violet: 0.25 parts by mass malachite green: 0.02 parts by weight
<感光性転写材料の作製>
 PET(A)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物1を乾燥膜厚3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、上記感光性樹脂組成物2を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。100℃温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写材料を作製した。
 比較例1において形成された感光性樹脂層は、ネガ型感光性樹脂層である。
 得られた感光性転写材料について、実施例1と同様にして評価を行った。ただし、引き置き安定性の評価にあっては、ネガ型感光性樹脂層の解像度が不足しており、ライン/スペース=10μm/10μmのパターンを持つフォトマスクを用いたパターン形成が不可能であったため、ライン/スペース=40μm/40μmのパターンを持つフォトマスクを使用した。評価結果は表1に記載した。
<Production of photosensitive transfer material>
On the PET (A), the composition for forming an intermediate layer 1 was applied in an amount of a dry film thickness of 3.0 μm using a slit nozzle. After the intermediate layer forming composition 1 was dried, the photosensitive resin composition 2 was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm. The film was dried with 100 ° C. warm air, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar) was pressed as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer material.
The photosensitive resin layer formed in Comparative Example 1 is a negative photosensitive resin layer.
The obtained photosensitive transfer material was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. However, in the evaluation of the holding stability, the resolution of the negative photosensitive resin layer is insufficient, and it is impossible to form a pattern using a photomask having a pattern of line / space = 10 μm / 10 μm. Therefore, a photomask having a pattern of line / space = 40 μm / 40 μm was used. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
(比較例2)
 実施例1において、中間層形成用組成物1の替わりに、上記中間層形成用組成物3を用いた以外は、実施例1と同様に感光性転写材料を作製し、評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
(Comparative Example 2)
In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the intermediate layer forming composition 3 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
(比較例3)
 実施例1において、中間層形成用組成物1の替わりに、下記中間層形成用組成物45を用いた以外は、実施例1と同様に感光性転写材料を作製し、評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
(Comparative Example 3)
In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 45 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
<中間層形成用組成物5の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物5は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 5>
The intermediate layer forming composition 5 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物5の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:62.7質量部
・ポリビニルアルコール((株)クラレ製、ポバールPVA-205):3.5質量部
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製、メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 5]
-Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass-Polyvinyl alcohol (manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., Poval PVA-205): 3.5 parts by mass-Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation, Mega Fuck (registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
(比較例4)
 実施例1において、中間層形成用組成物1の替わりに、下記中間層形成用組成物6を用いた以外は、実施例1と同様に感光性転写材料を作製し、評価を行った。評価結果は表1に記載した。
(Comparative Example 4)
In Example 1, a photosensitive transfer material was prepared and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the following intermediate layer forming composition 6 was used instead of the intermediate layer forming composition 1. The evaluation results are shown in Table 1.
<中間層形成用組成物6の調製>
 中間層形成用組成物6は、組成を下記組成とした以外は、中間層形成用組成物1と同様の方法により調製した。
<Preparation of intermediate layer forming composition 6>
The intermediate layer forming composition 6 was prepared by the same method as the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the composition was changed to the following composition.
〔中間層形成用組成物6の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:62.7質量部
・ヒドロキシエチルセルロース(三晶(株)製、サンヘックL):3.5質量部
・界面活性剤(DIC(株)製、メガファック(登録商標)F444):0.1質量部
[Composition of Intermediate Layer Forming Composition 6]
-Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 62.7 parts by mass-Hydroxyethyl cellulose (manufactured by Sanki Co., Ltd., Sun Heck L): 3.5 parts by mass-Surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation, MegaFuck) (Registered trademark) F444): 0.1 parts by mass
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016

 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016

 
 表1中、「中間層形成用組成物」の欄の「中間層:1/第二の中間層:3」等の記載は、「中間層の形成には中間層形成用組成物1を、第二の中間層の形成には中間層形成用組成物3をそれぞれ使用した」等を意味している。
 また、表1中の略語は下記の通りである。
In Table 1, the description of “intermediate layer: 1 / second intermediate layer: 3” in the column of “intermediate layer forming composition” indicates that “the intermediate layer forming composition 1 is used for forming the intermediate layer, The intermediate layer forming composition 3 was used for forming the second intermediate layer.
Abbreviations in Table 1 are as follows.
 HPMC:ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース
 HPC:ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース
 PVA:ポリビニルアルコール
 HEC:ヒドロキシエチルセルロース
HPMC: Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose HPC: Hydroxypropyl cellulose PVA: Polyvinyl alcohol HEC: Hydroxyethyl cellulose
 表1に記載した結果から、本開示に係る感光性転写材料によれば、コンタクト露光時のマスクの汚染が抑制されることがわかる。
 また、上記実施例における感光性転写材料は、引き置き安定性にも優れていることがわかる。
 比較例1~比較例4においては、中間層の仮支持体と接する側の表面における引っ掻き深さが0.40μm以上であるため、中間層に含まれる成分がガラスに付着した。
From the results described in Table 1, it can be seen that according to the photosensitive transfer material according to the present disclosure, contamination of the mask during contact exposure is suppressed.
Moreover, it turns out that the photosensitive transfer material in the said Example is excellent also in holding stability.
In Comparative Examples 1 to 4, since the scratch depth on the surface of the intermediate layer on the side in contact with the temporary support was 0.40 μm or more, the components contained in the intermediate layer adhered to the glass.
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電性層として酸化インジウムスズ(ITO)をスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電性層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写材料をラミネートした(線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min、ロール温度90℃)。仮支持体を剥離したのちに一方向に導電性層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてフォトマスクを中間層に接触させてコンタクト露光を行った。
 なお、図2に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅(実線部SL)とITO(グレー部G)とが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
(Example 101)
Indium tin oxide (ITO) was deposited as a second conductive layer on a 100 μm thick PET substrate by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer by vacuum deposition. A film was formed with a thickness of 200 nm to obtain a circuit formation substrate.
The photosensitive transfer material obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min, roll temperature 90 ° C.). After peeling off the temporary support, the photomask is intermediated using a photomask provided with a pattern shown in FIG. 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern A”) having a configuration in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction. Contact exposure was performed in contact with the layer.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows an alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a pattern A. Next, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), A substrate on which copper (solid line portion SL) and ITO (gray portion G) were both drawn with the pattern A was obtained.
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図3に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残ったポジ型感光性樹脂層を剥離液(10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 これにより、回路配線基板を得た。顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
Next, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with openings of a pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern B”) in the aligned state, and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 3, the gray portion G is a light shielding portion, and the dotted line portion DL is a virtual alignment alignment frame.
Thereafter, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining positive photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (10% by mass sodium hydroxide aqueous solution) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
As a result, a circuit wiring board was obtained. When observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
(実施例102~110)
 実施例2~実施例10で得た感光性転写材料をそれぞれ使用し、実施例101と同様の評価を行ったところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Examples 102 to 110)
Each of the photosensitive transfer materials obtained in Examples 2 to 10 was used and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 101. As a result, there was no peeling or chipping and the pattern was clean.
 10:仮支持体、12:中間層、14:ポジ型感光性樹脂層、16:カバーフィルム、SL:実線部、G:グレー部、DL:点線部 10: Temporary support, 12: Intermediate layer, 14: Positive photosensitive resin layer, 16: Cover film, SL: Solid line part, G: Gray part, DL: Dotted line part
 2018年3月29日に出願された日本国特許出願2018-65545の開示はその全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
 本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。
The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-65545 filed on Mar. 29, 2018 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference, Incorporated herein by reference.

Claims (14)

  1.  仮支持体と、
     中間層と、
     ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順で有し、
     前記仮支持体と前記中間層とが接しており、
     前記中間層の前記仮支持体と接する側の表面における、引っ掻き速度1mm/s、圧子の先端径0.075mm、荷重5gにより測定した引っ掻き試験の引っ掻き深さが0.40μm未満である、
     感光性転写材料。
    A temporary support;
    The middle layer,
    A positive photosensitive resin layer in this order,
    The temporary support and the intermediate layer are in contact with each other;
    On the surface of the intermediate layer on the side in contact with the temporary support, the scratch depth of the scratch test measured by a scratch rate of 1 mm / s, a tip diameter of the indenter of 0.075 mm, and a load of 5 g is less than 0.40 μm.
    Photosensitive transfer material.
  2.  前記中間層が、セルロースエーテル化合物を含む、請求項1に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the intermediate layer comprises a cellulose ether compound.
  3.  前記中間層が、粒子を更に含む、請求項1又は請求項2に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the intermediate layer further contains particles.
  4.  前記中間層に含まれる前記粒子の平均粒子径が、1nm~200nmである、請求項3に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 3, wherein an average particle diameter of the particles contained in the intermediate layer is 1 nm to 200 nm.
  5.  前記中間層と前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層との間に、前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層と接する第二の中間層を更に含み、
     前記第二の中間層が、セルロースエーテル化合物及びヒドロキシ基を有するアクリル樹脂よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含む、請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。
    Further comprising a second intermediate layer in contact with the positive photosensitive resin layer between the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer,
    The photosensitive property according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the second intermediate layer contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a cellulose ether compound and an acrylic resin having a hydroxy group. Transfer material.
  6.  前記第二の中間層が、粒子を更に含む、請求項5に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 5, wherein the second intermediate layer further comprises particles.
  7.  前記第二の中間層に含まれる前記粒子の平均粒子径が、1nm~200nmである、請求項6に記載の感光性転写材料。 The photosensitive transfer material according to claim 6, wherein the average particle diameter of the particles contained in the second intermediate layer is 1 nm to 200 nm.
  8.  前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含む、請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料。 8. The positive photosensitive resin layer according to claim 1, wherein the positive photosensitive resin layer includes a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. The photosensitive transfer material as described.
  9.  仮支持体上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
     前記中間層形成用組成物に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程を含む、
     請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料の製造方法。
    Applying a composition for forming an intermediate layer on a temporary support, and
    Including a step of applying a photosensitive resin composition to the intermediate layer forming composition,
    The method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10.  カバーフィルム上に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する工程、
     前記感光性樹脂組成物上に中間層形成用組成物を塗布する工程、及び、
     前記中間層形成用組成物上に仮支持体を貼り付ける工程を含む、
     請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料の製造方法。
    Applying a photosensitive resin composition on the cover film;
    Applying an intermediate layer-forming composition on the photosensitive resin composition; and
    Including a step of attaching a temporary support on the intermediate layer forming composition,
    The method for producing a photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  11.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
     仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記露光する工程後の前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む
     レジストパターンの製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8 into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
    Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
    A step of pattern exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
    And developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the exposing step to form a resist pattern in this order.
  12.  基板に対し、請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料の前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層側の最外層を前記基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性転写材料の仮支持体を剥離する工程と、
     仮支持体を剥離した感光性転写材料に対してフォトマスクを接触させて前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、
     前記レジストパターンが配置されていない領域における前記基板をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     回路配線の製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer on the positive photosensitive resin layer side of the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8 into contact with the substrate and bonding the substrate to the substrate;
    Peeling the temporary support of the photosensitive transfer material;
    A step of pattern exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer by bringing a photomask into contact with the photosensitive transfer material from which the temporary support has been peeled;
    Developing the positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resist pattern;
    And a step of etching the substrate in a region where the resist pattern is not disposed in this order.
  13.  請求項1~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写材料を用いて作製した回路配線を備えるタッチパネル。 A touch panel comprising circuit wiring produced using the photosensitive transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  14.  請求項13に記載のタッチパネルを備えるタッチパネル表示装置。 A touch panel display device comprising the touch panel according to claim 13.
PCT/JP2018/044988 2018-03-29 2018-12-06 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device WO2019187365A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020509632A JP7011047B2 (en) 2018-03-29 2018-12-06 Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, touch panel, and touch panel display device.

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018065545 2018-03-29
JP2018-065545 2018-03-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019187365A1 true WO2019187365A1 (en) 2019-10-03

Family

ID=68061028

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/044988 WO2019187365A1 (en) 2018-03-29 2018-12-06 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7011047B2 (en)
TW (1) TW201942680A (en)
WO (1) WO2019187365A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021166719A1 (en) * 2020-02-17 2021-08-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS63197942A (en) * 1986-11-14 1988-08-16 モートン サイオコール,インコーポレイティド Photosensitive laminate and image formation
JPH10207073A (en) * 1997-01-21 1998-08-07 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate
JP2004020643A (en) * 2002-06-12 2004-01-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Dry film resist and manufacturing method of printed circuit board
JP2007264483A (en) * 2006-03-29 2007-10-11 Fujifilm Corp Pattern forming material and pattern forming method
JP2008175957A (en) * 2007-01-17 2008-07-31 Asahi Kasei Electronics Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate
JP2009092818A (en) * 2007-10-05 2009-04-30 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, color filter and method for producing the same
US20110008733A1 (en) * 2008-03-11 2011-01-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Phototools having a protective layer
JP2012027357A (en) * 2010-07-27 2012-02-09 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Photosensitive film for sand blasting
JP2017120435A (en) * 2017-03-01 2017-07-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, pattern forming method and etching method
JP2018031847A (en) * 2016-08-23 2018-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS63197942A (en) * 1986-11-14 1988-08-16 モートン サイオコール,インコーポレイティド Photosensitive laminate and image formation
JPH10207073A (en) * 1997-01-21 1998-08-07 Toyobo Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate
JP2004020643A (en) * 2002-06-12 2004-01-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Dry film resist and manufacturing method of printed circuit board
JP2007264483A (en) * 2006-03-29 2007-10-11 Fujifilm Corp Pattern forming material and pattern forming method
JP2008175957A (en) * 2007-01-17 2008-07-31 Asahi Kasei Electronics Co Ltd Photosensitive resin laminate
JP2009092818A (en) * 2007-10-05 2009-04-30 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, color filter and method for producing the same
US20110008733A1 (en) * 2008-03-11 2011-01-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Phototools having a protective layer
JP2012027357A (en) * 2010-07-27 2012-02-09 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Photosensitive film for sand blasting
JP2018031847A (en) * 2016-08-23 2018-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2017120435A (en) * 2017-03-01 2017-07-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, pattern forming method and etching method

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021166719A1 (en) * 2020-02-17 2021-08-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body
JPWO2021166719A1 (en) * 2020-02-17 2021-08-26

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201942680A (en) 2019-11-01
JPWO2019187365A1 (en) 2020-12-03
JP7011047B2 (en) 2022-01-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6683890B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP6573721B2 (en) Patterned substrate manufacturing method and circuit board manufacturing method
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
JP2018169543A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
JP2018031847A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP2017156735A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for producing circuit wiring
TW201922817A (en) Method for manufacturing circuit wiring and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2018179641A1 (en) Photosensitive transferring material and method for producing circuit wiring
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6685461B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2019187365A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device
WO2019022089A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP7011046B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
TW201928534A (en) Method for manufacturing circuit board and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2019021622A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method
JP6685460B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP2018177889A (en) Manufacturing method of polymer solution for photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of composition for photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method of circuit wiring, and manufacturing method of touch panel
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP2019128445A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method thereof, and resin pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18912226

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020509632

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18912226

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1